JP2020073242A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing deterioration of reliability.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: first lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a first start condition; second lottery means for performing a lottery on the basis of establishment of a second start condition; special game state control means for controlling a game state to a special game state, when a lottery result of any of the first lottery means and the second lottery means is winning; second lottery priority means for performing a lottery by the second lottery means preferentially to the lottery by the first lottery means; establishment frequency improvement means which can improve an establishment frequency of the second start condition after finish of the special game state; and establishment state notification means for, at a finish point of time of the special game state which becomes a momentum for improving the establishment frequency of the second start condition, when a specific establishment state occurs, as an establishment state of the first start condition and the second start condition, performing a prescribed notification to an outside.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachi-slot machine”).

  Conventionally, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port of the plurality of starting ports, the first lottery is carried out to determine whether or not to make a big hit, and that the game ball has entered the second starting port. There is known a gaming machine which performs a second lottery on the basis of whether or not to make a big hit, and generates a big hit game state when these lottery results result in a big hit.

  In addition, by performing the priority control of performing the second lottery prior to the first lottery, and the time saving control of facilitating the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening after the jackpot gaming state is over, the jackpot game is performed. After the end of the state, there has been proposed a game game in which a second lottery occurs frequently (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2016-34535, A

  By the way, in the conventional game machine, the game may proceed with a behavior different from the original game behavior intended by the designer. For example, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, even if the time saving control is performed after the jackpot gaming state ends, if the game ball does not enter the second starting opening before the time saving control starts, the time saving control is performed. Immediately after the start, the first lottery may be performed instead of the second lottery. In this way, if the game progresses with a behavior different from the original game behavior intended by the designer, it may cause unexpected damage to the game hall, and as a result, the reliability of the gaming machine may be deteriorated. There is.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in reliability.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
First lottery means for performing lottery based on establishment of the first start condition,
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of the second start condition;
When the result of the lottery by either the first lottery means or the second lottery means is a win, special game state control means capable of controlling to a special game state different from the normal game state,
Second lottery priority means for performing the lottery by the second lottery means in preference to the lottery by the first lottery means,
Establishment frequency improving means capable of improving the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition more than usual after the end of the special game state,
At the end of the special gaming state, which is an opportunity to improve the establishment frequency of the second starting condition more than usual by the establishment frequency improving means, it is specified as the establishment condition of the first starting condition and the second starting condition. When the establishment status is generated, the establishment status notification means for performing a predetermined notification to the outside is provided.

  As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in reliability.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with a lid member removed. (A) is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as disassembled and seen from the rear. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame as viewed from the front right, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the front left. (A) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from the lower left rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in the cross-sectional view of FIG. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). Yes, (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which a different sphere guiding portion is provided. (A) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and (b) is an explanatory view schematically showing a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is a figure and (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.48 (b). 48A is a sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 48B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 48A. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit and was seen from behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production | operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a part of the operation button cut away to hide a portion to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be hidden by the first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of an operation button has extended. .. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 46B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. (A) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is the explanatory view which saw the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button has extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in FIG. 64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line in FIG.64 (b). 64A is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 64B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production | operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the 2nd production | operation operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the second base unit of the second production operation unit from the front. (A) is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and (b) shows the sub-screen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production | operation operation unit from the direction which the center axis of the operation button has extended in the state which faced forward. 74A is a sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74A, and FIG. 74B is a sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74B. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is an attempt to hide the second effect operation unit with the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button in a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is presenting, and (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross-sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). Is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is seen from the back of the door frame left side unit. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the front, (c) is seen the door frame right side unit from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line in FIG. 82 (a). 82A is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 82B is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 88 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main-body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payment unit for every main structure and was seen from back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a ball guide unit. (A) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the delivery apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the dispensing device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece in a dispensing apparatus, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball removal passage by the ball removal movable piece. (A) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit in a payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full ball path unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower tank ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower filled tank path | route unit and was seen from back. (A) is an explanatory view showing a state where a taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the taxiway opening / closing door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a distribution member. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 1st passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in a liquid crystal and a sound control unit. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 127 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game. (A) is a flow chart showing the procedure for main processing executed by the main control MPU, and (b) is a flow chart showing the procedure for interrupt processing periodically performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting mouth passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the hit judging processing performed by the main control MPU. (A) is a hit determination table used in the lottery process for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process for types of big hit, (C) is a type of small hit Is a small hit symbol determination table used in the lottery process, about (D) is a table showing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the first special design stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the 2nd special design stop design setting processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the big hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit control processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the small hit start processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about processing during a small hit performed by main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design process processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the universal figure prior determination process performed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design normal processing which is executed by the main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure hit judgment table used in the lottery process for hitting a universal figure, and (B) is a universal pattern hit pattern table used in a decision process for the opening pattern in hitting a universal figure. is there. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding the normal design fluctuation pattern decision processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a universal pattern variation pattern determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design fluctuation processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure concerning the normal design stop processing which is executed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the usual electric auditors thing opening processing performed by the main control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about sub main processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about 16mS regular processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about production control processing performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the effect display device in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production | operation in chance mode. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart showing the flow of the game during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of a game when a power interruption occurs during the chance mode. It is a time chart showing a flow of a game in the case where the power is cut off during the winning right exercising time. It is an example of an effect display that is executed when the game ball is received in the second starting opening during the chance mode by controlling the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode. It is an example of the effect display during the chance mode. It is an example of an effect display during the final battle effect. It is an example of an effect display during the final battle effect. (A) is a table showing an example of the effect sound data assigned to the effect channel, and (b) is a table showing an example of the error notification sound data assigned to the error notification dedicated channel. It is a time chart which shows an example when error notification of a left-handed warning is executed. 8 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a right-handed warning error notification is executed. It is an example of return of the effect display when the power is shut off during the chance mode. It is an example of return of the effect display when the power is shut off during the chance mode. It is an example of an effect display when right-handed stroke is not performed after the power is restored.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-back direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door-frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 which is attached to the lower part of the front surface on the lower side, and the player which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and which is changed by the game ball being driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and an upper side of the plate unit 320, which is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side above the dish unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted on the upper side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 attached to the lower part of the front of the game board 5 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 as viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout devices 830 are paid out one by one, and the game balls which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are moved downward. An upper full tank ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and a payout unit. Attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. Guide the game ball discharged from the tank discharge port 850e to the front and guide it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a bass speaker inside the body unit base 910, which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the front view left side of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in a front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of game balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950, .

  As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launching device 680. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face the same surface. Has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 21, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of extruded metal members such as aluminum alloys. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward from a position that is rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to a position near the rear end on the side surface that is the outer side in the left-right direction. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that are bulged from the side surface on the opposite side of the recesses 31 and 41 and are hollow inside. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to improve the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front side upper surface of the rear extending part 51 and the rear side extending part 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rearward extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, so that strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is, as shown in the drawing, a horizontally extending flat plate-like upper fixing portion 61 and a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate shape extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extending portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically to the left and right center of the front extending portion 62 from the right end of the front extending portion 62 toward the front, and vertically penetrating the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped lateral fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a lateral fixing portion extending downward from the end side of the front extending portion 62 around the left end to the front end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically extending near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upright from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70, the horizontal portion 71 is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extending portion 51 when the outer frame 2 is assembled. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame side upper hinge The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There is a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward more than the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends downward from the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower left fixing member 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging cutout portions 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the left and right end surface of the lower frame member 20, respectively. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

  In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and the abutment is made on the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Side Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c to be prevented, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

  Even if the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate in shape, the front end of the lock member 66 is directed to the outside of the front extension 62 at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

  When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is brought into a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

  When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing a game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the unauthorized tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the incorrect tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

  Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by using a gap between the main body frame 4 and the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame seen from the back. 26 is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangle (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 which covers a lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, A door frame 3 and a body frame 4, and a body frame 4 and an outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower plate 322 is provided.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end of the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. And a ball lending / returning display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards and the like, and a player's operation can be accepted in a predetermined state (for example, when performing performance, when adjusting volume, which will be described later, when adjusting brightness, etc.). Are A selection left button 331 and effect selection right button 332 out, and a lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging the game balls in the lower tray 322 below the tray unit 320, a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

  Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 (above the dish unit 320). The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 is provided with a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

  Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 with respect to the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 with light emission decoration.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 such that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (rotatable by a hinge). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side in the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape in a front view that extends vertically. The through-hole 111 has upper and left and right sides that form an inner circumference approaching the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and a lower side that forms an inner circumference moves up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally molded of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side slightly projects forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Of the cylinder lock 211, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The through hole 116 for the lower plate and the front and rear of the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 that extends along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and extends left and right, and a middle reinforcing member that extends under the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 that extends left and right. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement that is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and vertically separated from each other, and a pair of the door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped flange member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame is installed. And a lock spring 144 that biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape whose side view is open to the front. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The flange member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the flange member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. ..

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by the operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and in the door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a is provided.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped attachment piece (not shown) extended upward from the rear end of a horizontally extended flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state of being rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base 171. The glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and restricts the rearward movement of the upper part of the glass unit 190, and the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 has a protrusion 172 protruding from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably attached to the door frame base 110, so that the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located within the protrusion 172. .. From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where it projects downward from the base 171, the projecting portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the projection 172 does not entirely rotate so as to project upward from the base 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects upward from the base portion 171, and the projecting portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

  Since the axis of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110, thereby The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

  When the glass unit 190 is detached from the door frame base 110, it can be detached by the procedure reverse to the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and the left and right spaced apart. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward from the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000, an out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005, which will be described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 201, which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201. The rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in the state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 202 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not prevent the player from hitting the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 that transmits the rotation force to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder attachment sheet metal 213 that attaches the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcement unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a, and the corresponding key is either clockwise or counterclockwise when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in the direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side when viewed from the front side of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

  In the state where the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front side, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear case and the fraud prevention member removed. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 to the ball launching device 680 one by one, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be supplied to the upper plate ball. By operating the pull-out button 327, the lower plate can be pulled out.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 having an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b opening below the entrance 251a and having an open rear, and a box having a rear end closed and a front open. The rear cover 252 having the hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying the game ball entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launching device 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover. A partition portion 253 that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball removing member 253 and the game balls on the partition 253a of the ball removing member 253 are sent to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 one by one, and vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 rotatably supported around an extended axis and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 250, the ball feeding member 254 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 251a in a front view, and the ball removing member 253 is arranged on the left side of the ball feeding member 254 and the ball feeding member 254 of the ball feeding member 254. Ball feeding solenoids 255 are arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball removing port 251b in a front view. An operating rod 253c of a ball removing member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. It is formed so as to close the portion open to the rear on the end side from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 253 partitions the space between the entrance 251a and the ball removing opening 251b below the entrance 251a, and the upper surface of the partitioning portion 253a becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 254, and the ball of the partition 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254, bends in a V shape from the vicinity of the middle in the up-down direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b, and the lower end rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A pivot rod 253b movably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 253c protruding forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 253b, and a side of the pivot rod 253b below the operating rod 253c. The partition portion 253a is provided with a weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side. The operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 is formed so as to project forward through an arcuate slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a which is operated by pressing the upper dish ball removing button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feeding opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a blocking portion 254a, which is fan-shaped in a plan view around a rotation axis extending in the up-down direction and facing the entrance 251a and the partition portion 253a of the ball-removing member 253, and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a. It has a ball holding portion 254b which is recessed in an arc shape toward the center of the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod portion 254c which extends downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the axis of rotation. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size capable of holding one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the axis of rotation by moving the rod portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a supply position in which the blocking section 254a faces the partition section 253a and at the same time the ball holding section 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding section 254b faces the partition section 253a. It is adapted to rotate between a holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied to the ball launching device 680 from the hitting ball supply port 252a, and at the same time, the game ball has entered the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking section 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding section 254b (the hitting ball supply port 252a) side and remains on the partition section 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the rod portion 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition part 253a is held in the ball holding part 254b.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is moved forward and backward by the movement of the ball feeding solenoid 255, which causes the tip to swing vertically, and the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which swings vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 for rotating the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending vertically. The ball feed crank 257 is provided with an engaging portion 257a that is engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feed operating rod 256 and extends in the left-right direction, and a side of the engaging portion 257a that engages the ball feed operating rod 256. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is rotatably supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252, and extends upward from the shaft portion 257b. A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) protruding downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation of the member 254.

  This ball feeding unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feeding operating rod 256 which is rocked by the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 moving forward and backward by the ball feeding operating rod 256 and the ball feeding crank 257 to move the ball feeding member 254. It can be rotated. When the ball feeding solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state of being located at. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding actuating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 rotates to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254. The game ball received by can be sent (supplied) to the ball launch device 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951 in synchronization with the drive control of the firing solenoid 682.

  Further, the rotatably supported ball-stripping member 253 of the ball-sending unit 250 receives a moment to rotate counterclockwise in a front view by the weight portion 253d, but projects forward. Since the operating rod 253c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that operates by pressing the upper dish ball removing button 327 of the dish unit 320, the rotation thereof is restricted, so that the ball removing member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 downward, the upper plate ball removing slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise in a front view, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released by the partition 253a. To be done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball removing guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and is discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  In addition, since the upper dish ball pulling slider 327b in which the operation transmitting portion 327a with which the operating rod 253c of the ball punching member 253 abuts is formed, it is urged upward by the upper dish ball pulling spring 327c. Even if the game balls are vigorously supplied, the impact can be absorbed by the upper plate ball removing spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removing member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing off at the partition portion 253a.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 250 is provided with a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward rightward in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252, and The fraud prevention member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in a front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece portion 261 which is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center for a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece portion 262 and an inclined portion 263 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip sides (the right end sides in front view) of the sides of the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 that face each other are provided. .. The upper piece portion 261 of the tamper proof member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the tamper proof member 260 such that the right end in front view protrudes rearward. The lower piece portion 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 260. As a result, in plan view, the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to this fraud prevention member 260, a fraudulent game ball attached with a string is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 321 via the ball feeding unit 250 by the ball launching device 680 and is attached to the fraudulent game ball. When an illegal act such as operating a string to move an illegal game ball into and out of the first left starting opening 2002a is performed, due to the momentum of the illegal game ball launched (struck) by the ball launching device 680, The string attached to the illegal game ball is inserted between the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262, and then the V-shape narrowed by the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 is narrowed. It can be cut by the part that has been opened, and it is possible to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 38. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  The foul cover unit 270 is, as shown in the figure, a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and has an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. And 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates forward and backward at the upper left corner of the front view, and a through ball that connects the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit 320. The passage 273 and the full-ball receiving port 274 that is open to the rear on the lower right side of the through-ball passage 273 when viewed from the front and is capable of communicating with the lower full-ball guiding path 862 of the lower full-ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And are equipped with.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 does not reach the inside of the game area 5a despite being launched by the ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 on the right side of the full-ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front side. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball) and a game ball received in the full ball receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are opened forward in the vicinity of the lower right corner of the front view. And a ball discharge port 276 for discharging to the lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272 between the full ball receiving port 274, the foul ball receiving port 275, and the ball discharging port 276, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide space, a flat plate-shaped movable piece 278 that forms a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and has a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, A full tank detection sensor 279 for detecting rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277, and a spring 280 for biasing the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  In the foul cover unit 270, when the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 is filled with the game balls and the game balls are not discharged from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the weight of the game balls causes the upper end of the movable piece 278 to move away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. As a result, it is possible to determine that the lower plate 322 is full of game balls, so when the full tank detection sensor 279 detects a full tank, further payout of game balls is stopped, and This can be notified to the player or a person in charge at the game hall to urge the lower plate 322 to be completely filled.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through-ball passage 273, and the guide passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank ball passage unit 860 in the payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 described later. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operating protrusion 863e of 863 can abut is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves downward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed so that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the main body frame 4. When the actuating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream ends of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 (front opening). ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 40 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 40 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attaching member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 and can be operated by the player to drive the game ball in the upper plate 321 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the tubular portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front side of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatably attached inner base 304 and the handle base 301 to provide an outer periphery. A handle base 301 and an inner member having a shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, and a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306. A handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Further, the handle unit 300 has one end attached to the handle base 301 and the other end attached to the handle 302 so as to return the handle 302 to an initial rotation position (a rotation end in a counterclockwise direction in a front view). The urging handle return spring 308 and one end side of which is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side of which is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biasing in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip end side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 from the left side to the outside in a front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304. A single-shot button 311 attached to the base 301 rotatably around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 attached to the handle base 301 to detect a pressing operation of the single-shot button 311. There is.

  The handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 has a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b radially protruding from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at three unequal intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the tubular portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Therefore, the base 301a can be inserted into the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three grooves 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted in the three grooves 301c. When the handle base 301 is inserted, the handle base 301 becomes incapable of rotating relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four rotation protrusions (shaft member 305) and four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that are outwardly spaced apart from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction. Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the other end of the handle return spring 308 are locked so as to project rearward from a position inside the slit 302e with respect to the rotation center. Locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first projection 302a has a side surface in a clockwise direction in front view of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curved) so as to be curved inward. The second projection 302b is such that the most projecting portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the first projection 302a in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. It projects slightly lower. In the second protrusion 302b, the side surface in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front of the most projecting portion bulges so as to bulge outward, and the side surface in the opposite direction around the opposite direction curves inward. Thus, it is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  The third protrusion 302c has a portion of the handle 302 that is most protruded from the outer peripheral surface thereof, and is separated from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 302b in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It projects at about half the height. The side surfaces of both sides of the third protrusion 302c are inclined in a substantially straight line, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth projection 302d is such that the most projecting portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most projecting portion of the third projection 302c by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees in the clockwise direction, It projects slightly higher. The side surfaces on both sides of the fourth protrusion 302d are inclined in a substantially straight line, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that are rounded at the center of the front surface and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a penetrate the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301. Since the mounting boss 303a of the handle cover 303 penetrates the slit 302e of the handle 302, the mounting boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a rotation angle range of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seating surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outer side (open side), so that the handle mounting member 180 is fixed. The handle unit 300 mounted via the above also inclines outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip portion inclines so as to face the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). And fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. , A game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are plated with conductive material, and when the player touches the handle 302 or the like, the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid is emitted with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The drive of 682 is controlled so that a game ball can be hit. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 in some way without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be hit. I can't. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 302 by a method different from the original one and playing the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (load) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the one-shot button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the one-shot button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the one-shot button 311 and the firing control unit (illustration of the payout control board 951. Is omitted), the rotational drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. With this, it is possible to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302, and by releasing the pressing operation of the one-shot button 311, the driving before the one-shot button 311 is operated. With strength, the game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a.

  Further, the handle unit 300 is provided with four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is rotated most clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 302d is the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated. Since the positions are almost the same, the handle 302 can be held in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state for the player by changing the handle 302 by using the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a. It is possible to reduce the player's fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, if the player hits the ball to the right in the normal game state, the ball consumption becomes large, but it is difficult to receive the game ball in the various inlets. There is a disadvantage to the player as compared to the case of hitting.

[3-3. Overall configuration of plate unit]
The plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as seen from the front right, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as seen from the front left. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the upper right rear side, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from the lower left rear side. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the back. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged part of the lower plate in a state where the lower plate cover is removed in the sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and that is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. And a lower plate 322 that can be stored.

  The plate unit 320 is mounted on the plate-shaped plate unit base 323 that is attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and is attached to the upper front portion of the plate unit base 323, and the left side of the center in the left and right bulges greatly forward. An upper plate body 324 forming the upper plate 321 and a lower plate body 325 forming a lower plate 322 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower front portion of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to a large extent. And a plate unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper plate body 324 and the lower plate body 325.

  Further, the plate unit 320 includes an upper plate ball removal button 327 attached to the upper plate 321 on the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 so as to be able to be pressed from above in a front view right side, and a front view of the upper plate ball removal button 327. A ball lending button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball lending button 328, and a ball lending button 328. And the ball lending / returning display portion 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration portion 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper tray 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and the front of the lower plate 322 and the front of the plate unit cover 326 are projected forward. And has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44 and the like. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side of the center of the left and right when viewed from the front bulges largely to the front and opens upward. Has been done. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) is bulged to the front most about 1/3 of the width of the door frame 3 from the left end to the right. The upper plate 321 has a front end retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in a front view, and a guide passage portion 321a is formed whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. There is. The upper plate 321 is inclined such that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 321a is lower on the right end side, and the front end right end side of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) Underneath (see FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the plate unit base 323 is lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a. Is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of the. As a result, the game ball discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a to the upper plate. It can be supplied to the ball delivery port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower downward in the guide passage portion 321a having a narrow depth in the front-rear direction. That is, part of the upper plate 321 projects from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which the later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls. The upper plate 321 (upper plate body 324) projects into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to come into contact with the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal fitting 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, so that the game ball contacts (rolls) to become a game ball. The charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower plate 322 is arranged below the upper plate 321 and to the left of the center of the plate unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 322 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls, and is attached to the plate unit cover 326 and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a which vertically penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a to allow the game balls to be discharged. The escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the produced operation unit 400 (the second operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the front right corner is recessed rearward in an arc shape.

  The lower tray 322 has a lower tray main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are opened, a lower tray cover portion 326k that covers the lower tray main body 325 from the left end side thereof, and the lower tray main body 325 open. The tray unit base 323 is closed at the rear side, and the lower tray cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower tray main body 325 projecting into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 is exposed to the outside through the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a trapezoidal shape in which the outer peripheral shape in a plan view is a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side and the upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side. Is formed in a shape that is a combination of and, and the left and right sides of the trapezoid that extend obliquely are curved so as to be recessed rearward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear in a plan view.

  As shown in FIG. 43, FIG. 44, etc., the lower plate body 325 is formed in the shape of a container whose upper side and rear side are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer peripheral edge excluding the rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. And a lower dish ball removal hole 322a that penetrates vertically in a size as large as possible. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is a quadrangle that extends left and right, and a front side of the quadrangle is the bottom side, an upper side shorter than the bottom side is arranged on the front side, and the left and right sides that extend obliquely are curved backward. It is formed in a shape that is a combination of a trapezoid and a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface of the bottom wall portion 325a) is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall portion 325b rises upward from the bottom wall portion 325a at a height of 2 to 5 times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position closer to the right than the center of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a) in the left-right direction. In the lower plate main body 325, the curved portion of the front right corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b in front view corresponds to the relief portion 322b.

  The lower dish cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the right half portion above the lower dish body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish cover 340 includes a cover standing wall portion 340a that rises upward from an upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, and an upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a. And a ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from the front side portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 to the rear end of the right side. The lower plate cover 340 is assembled to the plate unit 320, and the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the plate unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall portion 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Further, the left end of the ceiling portion 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower tray cover portion 326k of the tray unit cover 326. In this lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion of the rear side thereof that extends obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b correspond to the relief portion 322b. There is.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with the plate unit cover 326 (rendering operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end in a front view of a portion extending to the left and right on the front end side, and half or more of the lower plate 322 is viewed in a front view. It is located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half goes around behind the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. The lower plate second area A2 (hatched in FIG. 45) located behind the right side of the opening 326d (the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). Area), and. In other words, the lower plate 322 has a half or more of a storage region (corresponding to a storage area in plan view, which is a combination of the lower plate first region A1 and the lower plate second region A2) capable of storing the game balls, It is located behind the effect operation unit 400. Note that, in FIG. 45, the hatched area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c of the plate unit base 323 forming the rear wall is opened to the right of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 which is on the rear side such as the side. As a result, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower dish ball supply port 323c cannot be seen from the player side through the lower dish opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Therefore, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to be hollowed toward the rear of the effect operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) which is bulged forward. The storage volume of the game balls is formed to be larger than the area visible from the front. In other words, the lower plate 322 is formed so that the lower plate second area A2 is larger than the lower plate first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (the player side), it is possible to store more game balls in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  As for the lower tray 322, the right half of the lower tray main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower tray second area A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), the production operation unit attachment portion 326a (the attachment space 326j) of the tray unit cover 326. ) Inside, and the lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the part of the lower plate body 325 which projects into the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a. This lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower plate 322 is provided with a lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate second area A2. The bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is inclined so as to decrease toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322 a of the lower dish 322 is openably and closably closed by a lid member 334 that operates by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the lower plate 322, in a normal state, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, and the game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322. Then, by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333 to open the lid member 334, the game balls in the lower dish 322 can be discharged to the lower portion of the dish unit 320 from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is arranged in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 forming the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400. It is not visible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower tray 322 is formed such that the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a trapezoid in which the front side is constricted on the front side of a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and the bottom surface is the lower tray ball-draining hole 322a. It is inclined so that it becomes lower toward. Therefore, with the lid member 334 opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a being opened, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 is directly in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. It is immediately discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the left end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is supplied. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the region on the left side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower dish 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. The ball comes into contact with the portion of the main body standing wall portion 325b that forms the standing wall on the right side of the lower tray 322. The right wall of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, so the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with an inclined portion, it is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without going to a region on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. (See Figure 45).

  In this way, since the lower dish 322 of the present embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In the state where is opened, without entering the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the area on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322, immediately from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the player does not see the game balls circulating on the lower dish 322, and thus is dispensed from the upper dish 321 and the dispensing device 830. It is possible to give an illusion that the game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box, and to make it difficult for the game balls to pass through the lower plate 322, so that the player can play the game (game ball driving operation). It is possible to suppress deterioration of interest by devoting itself to (or directing images).

  Further, since the lower tray 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray main body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b, the lower tray 322 is provided. Even if the game ball supplied inside jumps up in the lower plate 322, the game ball can be prevented from entering from the lower plate 322 to the mounting space 326j side, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 is It is possible to prevent contact with the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Therefore, it is possible that the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the game ball from damaging the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  Further, since the lower plate 322 has the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball supply port 323c discharges when the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a is open. Since the played game ball can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. You can Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball heading toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game balls discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 come into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and damage them. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. With this, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper dish 321, the game ball of the upper dish 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower dish ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is possible to further exert the above-described effects. The simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 that form the lower plate 322 are separate bodies that can be disassembled, but the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Further, an example is shown in which the cover standing wall portion 340a of the lower tray cover 340 rises from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, but from the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 to the lower tray cover 340. The cover standing wall portion 340a may stand up. Further, although an example in which the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 extends substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall portion 340a is shown, the ceiling portion 340b of the lower plate cover 340 is formed on the body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is provided with the relief portion 322b for avoiding contact with the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is shown, but the escape portion 322b is not provided. It may be used as the lower plate 322.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the lower plate 322 (the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.), one having a uniform planar shape without a penetrating hole is shown, but a plurality of penetrating holes through which game balls cannot pass. It may have a hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It may be formed into a net or a net. In addition, you may make it arrange | position the light-emitting body, such as LED, in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j), and illuminate the inside of the lower plate 322 through the fence-shaped or net-shaped gap of the lower plate 322 (light emission decoration). .

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) that are separately formed. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by integrating these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are Integrated plate, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323, integrated lower plate body 325 and plate unit base 323, plate unit base 323 and plate unit cover 326 Integrated with lower plate body 325, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit base 323, lower plate body 325, lower plate cover 340 and plate unit cover 326 The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Sphere guiding part of lower plate]
In the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320, an embodiment provided with a ball guide portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail with reference to FIG. . FIG. 46 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46 (b) is a schematic view showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from that in (a). It is a figure and (c) is an explanatory view showing roughly an example provided with a different ball guide part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

  In the example of the lower tray 322 of FIG. 46 (a), the diameter of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a at the site between the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower tray 322. It is provided with a pair of sphere guiding portions 322c which are spaced apart from each other on the right and left. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c are formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending forward and backward in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Further, the bottom plate 322 is inclined such that the bottom surface thereof becomes lower toward the bottom plate ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the game ball supplied into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is guided to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a by the pair of ball guiding parts 322c without getting over the ball guiding part 322c, and the lower plate ball It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  Then, in the same manner as described above, the lower plate 322 of this example has a lower plate ball supply port 323c and a lower plate ball on the rear side (lower plate second area A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The holes 322a are arranged linearly in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the production operation unit 400, the production operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is invisible from the front.

  As described above, since the lower dish 322 of this example includes the pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the state where the lower dish ball extraction hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without invading the region on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. You can

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), a rail-shaped one is shown as the ball guiding portion 322c, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Anything can be used as long as it can be guided to the countersunk hole 322a.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 of FIG. 46 (b), the game ball discharged right diagonally forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c on the wall portion on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. , Is formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and is provided with a buffer portion 322d at the portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer portion 322d is made of rubber or foam.

  Similarly to the lower plate 322 of this example, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is arranged directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a as it is. On the other hand, the game ball discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the right front is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the buffer portion 322d, and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. To be done. At this time, the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and is reflected, so that the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example also has a rear side on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 (the effect operation unit 400 in the lower plate second area A2 and the effect operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are arranged on the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 and the like) and are not visible from the front.

  In this way, the lower plate 322 of this example is provided with the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, so that even if the game ball is not discharged straight forward from the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The buffer portion 322d allows the sound to be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Therefore, when the game balls or the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that it seems that the game balls are also directly discharged to the dollar box. It is possible to make an illusion that the player does not feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, so that the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.) and suppress the decline in interest. Can be made

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), the lower plate 322 has a bottom plate (bottom wall portion 325a) on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball vent hole 322a interposed therebetween. It is provided with a return portion 322e which projects upward from and reflects the game ball that has jumped over the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a side. The return portion 322e may be made of the same material as the material forming the lower plate 322, or may be made of a cushioning material such as rubber or foam that reduces the collision noise during reflection. Further, the return portion 322e may not form the side wall of the lower plate 322, or may form a part of the side wall of the lower plate 322 (main body standing wall part 325b).

  In this lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line in order from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 is arranged. To the rear on the right side of the opening 326d (on the rear side of the cover operation wall such as the effect operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2, the effect operation unit attachment section 326a in the plate unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower plate cover 340). It is located and cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if a game ball flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball removal hole 322a side. Can be discharged to the lower part (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 may be appropriately combined with the ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. Thereby, it is possible to achieve the same effect as the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) schematically shows a state in which the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, Comprising: (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second area A2 as a boundary. The area indicated by the dotted hatch in FIG. 47 indicates the remaining space of the mounting space 326j.

  First, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. The main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A and constituting the remaining area of the lower tray second area A2 are provided. The first expansion unit 325B is further more than the main body unit 325A, the remaining space of the installation space 326j in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is housed (of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A). It projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension part 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. Further, the first extension section 325B has a relief section 322b formed at the front right corner for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A.

  Next, in the example of FIG. 47 (b) and FIG. 47 (c), the rear end of the effect operation unit 400 does not project rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and thus the example of FIG. The space behind the effect operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is wide. The lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a, and a main body portion 325A. It is attached to the right side of the section 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower plate second area A2, and is provided with a second extension section 325C larger than the first extension section 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension portion 325C has a constant width in the left-right direction from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger game ball storage area than the first extension portion 325B. Further, a lower tray cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension section 325C is attached to the lower tray 322 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls are in a continuous (communication) state, and the storage area of the game balls. Expands. Further, the boundary between the main body portion 325A and the first extension portion 325B or the second extension portion 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first additional portion 325B and the second additional portion 325C in the lower plate body 325 are in a predetermined gap (communication with the mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be divisible, and at least one of the divided members is replaceable, so that the game balls in the lower plate 322 are The storage area can be increased or decreased as required. Further, since the lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be separable, the projection operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 is projected rearward (in the attachment space 326j). An extension unit (first extension unit 325B or second extension unit 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above-described embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower plate second area A2 that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), but the dividing line PL is It may be arranged on the boundary line between the plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2, or may be arranged in the lower plate first area A1.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 (lower tray 322) is provided with the lower tray ball removal hole 322a in the main body portion 325A. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be provided.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 is shown with the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat plate-shaped closing member having no storage region may be attached.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the lower tray body 325 of the lower tray 322 has been described, but the lower tray cover 340 can be divided in the same manner as the lower tray body 325, or the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. You may make it the shape according to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Plate unit base]
The plate unit base 323 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 below the through hole 111, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is open). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front and also has an upper dish ball supply port 323a extending cylindrically rearward, and penetrates forward and backward under the upper dish ball supply port 323a. A speaker slit 323b formed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating forward and backward in a lower part to the left from the left-right center in a front view and extending rearward in a tubular shape, An upper plate ball feed port 323d is provided which penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in a front view, extends vertically, and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the dish unit base 323, a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the plate unit base 323 through the upper plate ball feed opening 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, and a ball. After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in a cylindrical front view, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the discharged game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the ball feed guide path 323e in a front view, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball guide path 323f. The operation transmitting portion 327a that penetrates the front and rear at a height position between them and comes into contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and is operated by the upper bowl ball removing button 327 protrudes so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The downstream end of the ball removal guide path 323f opens into a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and has a handle insertion opening 323h through which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323 has the front end opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 321 and the cylindrical rear end is the upper plate passage port of the door frame base 110 when assembled to the door frame 3. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game balls paid out from the payout unit 800 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower dish ball supply port 323c, when assembled to the door frame 3, has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 322 and a cylindrical rear end penetrating the lower plate passage port 116 of the door frame base 110 from the front side. And is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270. As a result, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower dish ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 (on the right outside of the lower plate opening 326d), the front end side of the lower plate cover 340, and the like. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Plate unit cover]
The plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has a center portion in the left-right direction that bulges forward, a large opening forward in the center in the left-right direction, and a production operation unit mounting portion 326a to which the production operation unit 400 is attached, and on both left and right sides of the production operation unit mounting portion 326a. A plate front upper decorative portion 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper plate 321 and a plate front lower decorative portion 326c formed below the left and right plate front upper decorative portions 326b, respectively. There is.

  The effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed to have a size in the left-right direction of about 1/3 of the entire width of the dish unit 320 in the left-right direction, and the up-down direction is substantially the same as the height of the dish unit 320 in the up-down direction. Formed at height. Further, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined so that the front end moves backward as it goes upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front side of the plate front decorative portion 326b moves rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends, and the end of the plate unit cover 326 on the center side in the left-right direction and the left and right ends. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape which is slightly bulged forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the. Further, the plate front upper decorative portion 326b is inclined such that the lower end thereof moves upward from the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the left and right ends thereof, and the center side of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction ( It is formed such that the vertical direction is narrowed from the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a side) toward both left and right ends. The plate unit cover 326 has an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 attached to the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view.

  The plate front lower decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends of the plate unit cover 326. The curved surface is formed such that the intermediate portion is recessed rearward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions of the.

  A lower plate opening 326d penetrating forward and backward is formed in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view, and the lower plate 322 faces forward from the lower plate opening 326d. In the dish front lower decoration portion 326c on the left side in front view, the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower plate opening 326d in the plate front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. The lower speaker opening 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 when assembled in the dish unit 320.

  The dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the right side in front view has a handle insertion port 326f that penetrates the front and rear at the lower right corner in front view and into which the tubular portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a front view. A cylinder insertion port 326g is formed in the vicinity of the right corner, which penetrates forward and backward above the handle insertion port 326f and into which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The plate unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate portion 326h extending from the upper end of the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the right side in front view to the front end of the plate unit base 323. It covers the upper right side. On the top plate portion 326h, an upper dish ball removal button 327, a ball lending button 328, a return button 329, and a ball lending display portion 330 are attached.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat plate-shaped bottom plate portion 326i extending from the lower end of the dish front lower decoration portion 326c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom plate portion 326i closes the lower side of the dish unit 320. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a stepped shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from the lower side to the upper side, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 to be described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a vertically penetrating hole at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 is provided with a mounting space 326j that is opened forward at a portion of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a and into which the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). Further, the dish unit cover 326 extends downward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d in a flat plate shape, and includes a lower dish cover 326k that covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover portion 326k is configured such that the left end is in contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall portion 325b in the lower plate body 325, and the right end is in contact with the left end of the ceiling portion 340b in the lower plate cover 340. There is.

[3-3e. Upper plate ball removal button]
The upper plate ball removing button 327 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper plate ball removing button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper plate 321 when viewed from the front. By pressing the button, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are moved to the lower plate 322. It can be pulled out. Although not shown in detail, the upper dish ball removal button 327 has a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326, so that the rear end side is below the top plate portion 326h. It is mounted rotatably about an axis extending to the. The upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end thereof at the upper end of a vertically extending ball removal lever. The ball-draining lever is mounted slidably in the vertical direction by a ball-draining base mounted on the front surface of the platen unit base 323 below the upper plate ball-draining button 327.

  The ball removing lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removing button 327 is in contact with the upper part of the upper plate ball removing slider 327b that is slidable up and down by the plate unit base 323 from above. ing. This upper dish ball removing slider 327b is provided with an operation transmitting portion 327a protruding rearward from the rear surface, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, this operation transmitting portion 327a is opened from the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It projects rearward so as to face it, and abuts on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 of the ball feeding unit 250 from below. The upper plate ball removing slider 327b is biased upward by an upper plate ball removing spring 327c, and the upper plate ball removing spring 327c biases the upper plate ball removing slider 327b and the ball removing lever. The upper bowl ball removing button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper bowl ball removing button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper bowl ball removing spring 327c, the operation transmitting portion 327a of the upper bowl removing slider 327b moves downward and the operation transmitting portion 327a moves. Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. As a result, the game balls in the upper plate 321 are discharged from the ball discharge port 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball discharge guide path 323f of the plate unit 320, and discharged to the lower plate 322 via the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Can be (supplied).

  It should be noted that when the upper dish ball removing button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removing hole 322a may be interlocked with and movable. With this, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 also moves and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a opens, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed from the lower dish ball. It will be discharged from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper dish 321, the game ball of the upper dish 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower dish ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a strong illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 are directly discharged to the dollar box, and it is difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game balls pass through the lower plate 322. It is possible to depress the player by devoting himself / herself to a game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). The simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball loan button, return button, and ball loan return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41. As illustrated, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending display unit 330 are inside the circular decoration on the right side of the upper plate ball removing button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the plate unit cover 326 when viewed from the front. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 inserts cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 and then presses it to plate a predetermined number of game balls. The unit 320 is rented (dispensed) into the upper plate 321 of the unit 320. When the return button 329 is pressed with cash or a prepaid card inserted into a ball lending machine, the return button 329 deducts the rented game balls and then returns the cash or the prepaid card.

  Although illustration is omitted, the ball lending / returning display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED arranged on the lower side of the transparent surface. The error code and the like when the ball lending machine fails are displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 41 and the like. As shown in the drawing, the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached to the plate unit cover 326 near the right end near the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a in the plate front upper decorative portion 326b on the left side in front view. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex facing left. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one apex directed to the right of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are displayed to the player on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in a front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, the pressing operation can be accepted, and the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated within a predetermined time to select a desired option. ..

[3-3h. Lower plate ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is located below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326, which is in front of the lower dish 322, and protrudes forward from the lower end of the front surface of the dish front lower decorative portion 326c on the left side in front view. By pressing this lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower dish 322 can be discharged below the dish unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 can be slid forward and backward by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42 (b)) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 below the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is arranged to the left of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower tray ball punching base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a which has a size equal to the lower tray ball punching hole 322a and which penetrates vertically in a position immediately below the lower tray ball punching hole 322a. .. Although not shown in detail, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish main body 325 and the lower dish ball removing base 335. As a result, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a. And are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removing base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position to the left of the lower dish ball removing button 333 in a plan view. The lower plate ball removing button 333 is connected to a part between the part of the lid member 334 that closes the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and the part that is rotatably attached by the lower plate ball removing base 335. With this, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates around an axis extending vertically, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown in the drawings, the lower plate ball removing base 335 holds the lower plate ball removing button 333 when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is moved rearwardly, and a lower plate ball removing button. And a lower dish ball pulling spring that urges 333 forward. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved rearward, the lid member 334 rotates. When the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened by the movement, the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device, and remains moved rearward. In this state, even if the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 does not move forward, and the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is maintained in an open state. The game ball in 322 can be discharged below the plate unit 320 through the lower plate ball removing hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed rearward, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, when the lower plate ball removing button 333 is released, the lower plate ball removing button 333 moves forward by the urging force of the lower plate ball removing spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. As a result, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. This allows the game balls to be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) also moves by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. With this, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box arranged below the plate unit 320, only by operating the upper plate ball removing button 327, the lower box 322 can be used for the dollar box. It is possible to discharge the ball, and it is possible to simplify the trouble of removing the ball. The simultaneous opening of the upper tray 321 and the lower tray 322 for ball removal may be simultaneous opening by driving a drive source such as a motor or solenoid, or may be simultaneous opening by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 48 (a), and FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56 and the like. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent on the center side except the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 that is attached is provided, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

  The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend on the axial line toward the center side in a state of being recessed in an arcuate cross-section from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side, and are arranged in a row within a predetermined angle range in the circumferential direction. A plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening portion 412a of the button frame 412, and also protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a rear main body 413a from the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged rearward along the outer circumference of the columnar shape and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape that extends from the front end of the main body 413a to the front and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction such that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by contacting the front side of the outer peripheral edge with the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 is restricted. By pressing against the front end, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  Also, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and an operation button is attached by a button frame 412 attached to an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 is changed. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button bottom of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front side from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the target area for light-emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed such that its outer shape is in conformity with the front end side of the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that has a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 mounted from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 mounted from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a which penetrates forward and backward on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and three outer peripheral openings 416b are provided, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. Is located between the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and that are mounted to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

  The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, three each from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed into a smooth surface without any unevenness, and a plurality of unevenness is formed along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 has the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 allow light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 to 57 and the like. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decoration board 422 and an operation button right outside decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front surface side and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same. The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 have white front and rear surfaces.

  An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to light and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the rendering operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60 and the like. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the base unit of the effect operation unit that is disassembled and seen from the rear. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward.

  The base unit 430 includes four through holes 431a attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and penetrating in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically in the central portion, and a blind hole that is open to the front outside the through hole 431a. An annular unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button interior decoration member 432 which is attached to the front surface of the unit base 431 so as to cover the through hole 431a and extends in the front and rear in a short tubular shape, The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 which are attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432. The operation which is attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear side. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  Further, the base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 that are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Three press detection sensors 440 that are respectively attached to 439 and that detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, a production operation unit relay board 441 that is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and a production operation unit relay board 441. And a relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape, and is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth at the center, and has a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted therethrough. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at the upper, lower, left, and right four corners outside the through hole 431a at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 431b have an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted therein.

  More specifically, among the four holding holes 431b, the holding hole 431b on the upper left side is located at the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. Further, the holding hole 431b on the upper right side of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at the positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the two upper holding holes 431b. ..

  In addition, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape between a portion to which the operation button upper decoration substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached on the upper front surface. Is equipped with. With the light shielding wall portion 431c, the frame top lens 418 can be illuminated and decorated only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that a substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a extending in the front-rear direction and a front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center thereof protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that penetrates the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d. And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e protruding rearward from the mounting base 431 and mounted to the unit base 431.

  An outer diameter of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating the front plate 432b is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button interior decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed into smooth surfaces without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decoration member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and a plurality of first button inner decoration portions 432f are provided in the circumferential direction. , Is formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulges in an arc shape, extends in a modified octagonal shape centered on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and is concentric about the center of the front plate portion 432b. A plurality of second button internal decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion that extends in parallel with the four inner peripheral portions of the opening portion 432c.

  The operation button interior decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The rear portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is not clearly visible due to the lens effect of the first button inner decoration portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. ..

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 each have a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side. The operation button interior decoration member 432 can be made to emit light by emitting light. By illuminating and decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432, the interior of the operation button 410 and the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be luminescently decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by making these LEDs emit light, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be made to emit light.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are full-color LEDs, respectively. It is said that. The front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 is white. ..

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 has a rear end abutting on the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and a front end protruding rearward from the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the effect operation unit 400. It is in contact with the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation button 410 forward.

  The three pressing detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressure detection sensors 440 are, on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, another on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other one on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 431 as the center. These three pressure detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side in front view) of the through hole 431a in rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 is an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, the operation button lower interior decoration board 436, the frame top lens decoration board 437, the press detection sensor 440, and the door frame side effect display device 460, and for relaying the connection with the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100. It is a thing.

  The relay board cover 442 extends from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441 to the left in front view, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear surface of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a lower surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and is between the bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. To form a slight gap (see FIG. 26). Accordingly, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the frame unit 415 is held until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326. The impact can be absorbed by bending the mounting portion 416e, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the performance operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the performance operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the central portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface, and to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 and to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The outer periphery of the mounting bracket 462 is formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and the mounting bracket 462 is attached so that the bottom portion of the bottomed tubular shape contacts the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In the state in which the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 penetrates the through hole 431a of the unit base 431 from the rear side and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located near the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button interior decoration member 432, and faces the front from the opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image on the liquid crystal display device 461 based on a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory view showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the cross sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production | operation operation unit. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

  The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a central side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protruding forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (partial shape of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The main body 416 of the frame unit 415 projects forward from a central opening 416a (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by an outlined arrow in FIG. 61, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL will be pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed in a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When the part of the operation button that is deviated from the center is pressed, the pressing surface is tilted so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moving straight backward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61) that is relatively easy for the player to press, the player who is pressing the operation button 410 is provided. Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the performance.

  Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operation unit attachment of the dish unit cover 326 is attached. It is possible to avoid applying unreasonable force to the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 63, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button inner decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part in the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the portion of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side or the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. Since they are arranged in concentric circles, the uneven line of the first button decoration part 411a and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration part 432g intersect, as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the second button decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with a depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, whereby the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside decoration substrate 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outside decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is positioned between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be excellently light-emitting decorated.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 430 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-4 g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Performance Operation Unit]
Next, a second effect operation unit 400A that is the second embodiment of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71 and the like. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from that of the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. 65A is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. 64 (a). 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH in FIG. 64 (b). 69 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line I-I in FIG. 64 (b), and FIG. 69 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. It is a figure.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. In the following, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second effect operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and is transparent on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the effect of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, and a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged behind the operation button 410 and capable of performing light emission decoration on the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415. The second base unit 450 mounted on the rear side of the frame unit 415 and having the operation button 410 and the decorative substrate unit 420 mounted on the front surface, and the second base unit 450 visible through the operation button 410 from the player side. The second effect table attached to the door frame that can display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A when viewed from the front and a surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. The relay board cover 516 is attached to the right side surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the front view right side surface of the projector attachment member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outside decoration board 422, an operation button right outside decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, and the like. And the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door main body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 to relay the connection.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72 and the like. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. It is a figure. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 includes a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) such that the outer circumference is circular and the central side bulges forward, and an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 are provided. It has substantially the same configuration as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that, between the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one apex on the center side of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner circumference of the button frame 412. A truss-like pattern in which a plurality of triangles facing each other and a triangle with one apex facing away from the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference, and a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern. Right-angled triangular pattern composed of a bottom side facing the center side of the, a side extending from both ends of the bottom side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the bottom side. And a hypotenuse of the right triangle, a side extending from the center of the bottom of the truss triangle to the center of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle, and from the tip of that side. And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. Although illustration is omitted, the triangles forming the first button decoration portion 411a are formed in a polyhedron shape with their respective faces facing different directions. As a result, the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, while the back surface side is formed in a polyhedron shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, and thus the first button decoration portion 411a. In this area, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes intricately, and light passing through this area is irregularly refracted. Therefore, at the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, the geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to the irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c of the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape whose rear is open. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and has a tubular shape and is held inside the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 inside the button shaft 452. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 that is inserted into the guide boss portion 413c from the rear side.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed such that its outer shape is in conformity with the front end side of the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 57, 69 to 71, and the like. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. The second effect operation unit 400A can be given vibration.

  The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decoration board 422 and an operation button right outside decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400, and the same reference numerals are given and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 73 and the like. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. In the second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to move forward and backward, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and it is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what is done.

  The second base unit 450 has a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and a rear portion inside the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 protruding from the front surface of the unit base 451. Four columnar button shafts 452 slidably inserted from each other, and an operation button spring that inserts each of the four button shafts 452 and urges the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410 forward. (Not shown), and three pressing detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and that detect three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b protruding rearward from the inner peripheral edge of the main body 451a in a hemispherical shape, and a vertical direction with respect to the front surface of the main body 451a. When viewed, the through-hole 451c is a substantially rectangular shape that extends vertically and penetrates the cover 451b back and forth, four holding holes 451d recessed rearward from the front surface of the main body 451a, and the main body 451a. The upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front surface to the rear portion in the upper portion of the main body portion 451e and the semicircular shape that is coaxial with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front surface to the rear portion in the lower portion of the body portion 451a The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed in a (U shape) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner circumference and an outer circumference that are substantially the same size as the board base 421 of the C-shaped decorative board unit 420. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed in such a size that the cover portion 451b can be housed without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A rotatably attached by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f rotates. There is. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from the rear side.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at four corners of the front, bottom, left, and right of the front surface of the main body 451a at positions corresponding to the four guide bosses 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. The holding holes 451d have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted therein. A button shaft 452 is mounted in the four holding holes 451d coaxially with the central axis thereof. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d projects forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. The button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d is inserted into the tubular guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, so that the operation button 410 is attached slidably in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. You can

  The upper left holding hole 451d of the four holding holes 451d extends counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated by about 30 degrees in the direction. Further, the holding hole 451d on the upper right side of the four holding holes 451d is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a vertically extending center line passing through the center of the unit base 451 (center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the two upper holding holes 451d. ..

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are inserted into the four holding holes 451d, respectively, and the front ends of these operation button springs come into contact with the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c, so that the operation button springs are pressed through the guide boss portions 413c. 410 is biased forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape whose front is open and which extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions that extend in a semicircular arc are located coaxially. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, after the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474A of the door frame side second effect display device 460A are inserted from the front, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. By being attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The front surface of each of the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 passes through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed rearward in a U shape. Are formed so as to be separated from each other in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g restrict the rotation range of the screen unit 470 by contacting the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. There is. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to the angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction parts 451g.

  Although not shown in the drawings, magnets are embedded in the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g, and the magnets are magnetically attached to the iron plates attached to the stoppers 475b to contact the rotation restricting portions 451g. It is difficult for the stopper 475b that has been moved to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Therefore, in the screen unit 470, the main screen 471 is in the first position with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b facing forward, or the second screen with the sub-screen 472 facing forward. The screen unit 470 can be held in any one of the position states, and the movement of the screen unit 470 that is about to rotate is suppressed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration of the vibration motor 424 or the like, and the door frame side. The effect image produced by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. More specifically, the three pressing detection sensors 454 remain on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d, respectively. The three pressure detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction with the center of the unit base 451 as the center. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 and can show the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 mounted rotatably around an axis extending vertically by an upper bearing portion 451e and a lower bearing portion 451f of the second base unit 450, and a second base. An upper bearing member 480 mounted on the upper front surface of the unit 450 and rotatably mounted on the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and on the lower front surface of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  In addition, the door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a rotary drive unit 490 that is rotationally driven to drive the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper portion of the second base unit 450, and a cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450. A projector 500 that is arranged and is capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, the projector 500 is attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. And a box-shaped projector mounting member 505 whose front is open, and a rotary drive unit 490 on the upper part of the second base unit 450 mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side in a front view. The upper cover 506 and the upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably attached to the second base unit 450 about an axis extending vertically, and by projecting an effect image from the projector 500, The effect image can be displayed (projection display) so as to be visually recognized by the player.

  The screen unit 470 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape, has a milky white main screen 471, and a translucent main screen 471. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, has a milky white color, and has translucency, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 to the axially outward direction. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, an operating gear member 475 attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and having gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half of the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. And a sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIGS. 74 and 75, etc.) which is transparent and is formed in a relief pattern imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub screen. A sub-screen decorative substrate 477 (see FIG. 75, etc.) that is attached to the back surface side of 472 and has a plurality of LEDs 477a mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472, and the opposite side of the sub-screen 472 of the main screen 471. A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends shortly from the end portion toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 is formed such that its axial length is approximately 4/3 times the radius of the semi-cylindrical shape. Both ends of the main screen 471 in the axial direction are decorated so as to be framed by the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472 and the peripheral decoration member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which its central axis extends (see FIG. 74 (b)). .. The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and has a peripheral edge decoration portion 472a in which a plurality of pyramidal pyramidal irregularities are provided in a row in the circumferential direction and closes the inside of the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a. And a curved screen portion 472b having a curved surface. The peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side thereof projects in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in the direction away from the main screen 471. A through hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472, and a sub screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are rotatably attached by being inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, respectively.

  The actuating gear member 475 engages with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotary drive unit 490 and is formed to extend outward from one of the gear teeth 475a formed over substantially half the circumference and one end of the gear teeth 475a in the circumferential direction. A stopper 475b and a detection piece 475c protruding outward from the side opposite to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 in a state of being assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is regulated by coming into contact with the pair of rotation regulating portions 451g of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 located at both ends of the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like this.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed of a transparent member in a relief shape imitating a skull, and since the plate thickness thereof changes intricately, the transmitted light is complicatedly refracted and the rear side is visually recognized. It's getting harder. Although not shown in detail, the sub-screen decoration member 476 has a letter "PUSH" formed in a relief imitating a skull.

  The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the back surface side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the plurality of LEDs 477a on the front surface side (the side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476, and has a white surface. By making the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light. More specifically, by causing the LED 477a to emit light, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can strongly light and decorate the "eye" portion and the "PUSH" portion of the skull.

  Further, since the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is arranged relatively close to the sub-screen 472 and does not have a member for diffusing light between the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 and the sub-screen 472, the LED 477a emits light. The point light source of the LED 477a can be recognized by the player. Further, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 can be projected on the sub-screen 472 by the projector 500.

  The peripheral decoration member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and like the peripheral decoration portion 472a, a plurality of quadrangular pyramidal concavities and convexities are provided in the circumferential direction of the arc. ..

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are open to the front in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the main body portion of the unit base 451. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state in which the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing part 451e and the lower bearing part 451f of the unit base 451, respectively. By mounting on the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably mounted on the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper part of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing part 451e whose front side is open. And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the front surface of the upper portion of the frame 481. The bearing member 481 has a concave portion 481a which is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface toward the front so that the center in the left-right direction becomes deepest. The recess 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape around the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 when assembled in the second rendering operation unit 400A, and has a screen inside. The stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and arranged, and the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. The recessed portion 481a recessed in an arc shape allows the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 to rotate favorably between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface side of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480, and the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 is located behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in the state assembled in the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. As a result, by making the LEDs of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 by inserting the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. Can be rotatably mounted.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotary drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can rotate the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 that is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and has a hollow interior, and a switching drive motor 492 that is attached to the lower surface of the unit case 491 and has a rotation shaft protruding into the unit case 491. , A spur gear-shaped drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshing with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A transmission gear (not shown) is meshed with the first transmission gear, meshes with gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. And a second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the rotary drive unit 490 assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotary drive unit 490 rotationally drives the switching drive motor 492 to rotate the screen unit 470 around the axis extending back and forth through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector 500 is arranged in the hemispherical cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 via the projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cube-shaped projector main body 501 mounted on the projector mounting member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates a production image forward from the front end.

  In this projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector mounting member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are arranged in the cover portion 451b by passing through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Mounted as.

  The projector 500 can project the effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display a still image or a moving image as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in the shape of a box with the front open, and has the projector 500 mounted therein and the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector mounting member 505 can be mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 to cover the cover portion 451b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, and the projector 500 can be mounted in a state in which the projector 500 is tilted to match the tilt of the operation button 410. .. The rear wall of the projector mounting member 505 is formed with a plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction, and heat emitted from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second effect operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are mounted on the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 when viewed from the front.

[3-4g-5f. Top cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to cover the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensor 507 is for detecting the rotation position of the screen unit 470, and two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 so as to be separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are mounted at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction about the rotation axis of the screen unit 470, and are the operating gears of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are a detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward and a second position in which the sub screen 472 faces forward. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. The rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c from these two rotation detection sensors 507.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and absorbs the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is struck from above, and the plate unit cover in the plate unit 320. It is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i of 326.

  The cushioning unit 510 is in contact with the lower surface of the cushioning member 511 and the elastically deformable flat plate-like cushioning member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. The buffer base 512 is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the cushioning member 511, and leg pieces that project downward from both left and right ends of the main body portion 512a in a front view and extend in the front-rear direction. And 512b. The leg pieces 512b of the cushioning base 512 are in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate 326i of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 of the buffer unit 510 when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward. Move down to. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 moves further downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 comes into contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since a gap is formed between the body portion 512a and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 by the left and right leg pieces 512b, the projector mounting member that is in contact with the upper surface side of the body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-shaped main body portion 512a is bent, and the shock can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a that is bent downward comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the production operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit cover 326 can be absorbed. It is possible to prevent unreasonable force from acting on 326a and the like, and prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effect of second production operation unit]
The effect of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 to 77 and the like. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is the explanatory view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the screen was turned to the front. Further, FIG. 75 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button or the button frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is trying to do, and (b) shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG. FIG. 77 (a) is a view of the second effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion of the operation button, the button frame, or the like. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is trying to do, and (b) shows the site | part which is going to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the sectional view of the 2nd production | operation operation unit of the state of (a). FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or the operation button according to the game state that changes when the game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is possible to display the effect image in 410 and entertain the player, and also to allow the player to operate the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second effect operation unit 400A is formed to have substantially the same height as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is formed such that the overall width thereof is slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in a front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit 320, and is between the lower end of the leg piece portion 512b of the cushioning base 512 of the cushioning unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. A gap is formed in the. That is, in the second effect operation unit 400A, only the upper part is attached to the dish unit 320, and the second effect operation unit 400A is attached in a suspended state.

  In addition, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. It is installed so that. As a result, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis line CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) becomes a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). The central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the player's head because it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Therefore, when the player drops his or her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is possible in its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Therefore, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 slide on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In the normal state (the state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 due to the urging force of the operation button spring. Of the frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the center side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner circumference of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 is forward from the center opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It is protruding. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (partial shape of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A in the normal state, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation buttons for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis thereof extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL of the button 410 is inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part is pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, since the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed in a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When the part of the operation button that is deviated from the center is pressed, the pressing surface is tilted so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment, the part (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (part of a substantially spherical surface) bulged forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is distributed to the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight rearward. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is hung. Since only the upper part is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, the vibration is generated at the portion farthest from the attached portion. Since it occurs, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be vibrated largely (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second effect operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (near the upper portion of the operation button 410) which is relatively easy for the player to perform the pressing operation, strong vibration is exerted on the player who is pressing the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, which can surprise the player and entertain the production.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the plate unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the plate unit cover 326 are attached. The buffer unit 510 is arranged between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface. The cushioning unit 510 includes a cushioning member 511 that is elastically deformable, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512a where the cushioning member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or tapped downward, the impact is multistaged by elastic deformation (compression) of the cushioning member 511, bending of the main body portion 512a of the cushioning base 512, or the like. It is possible to absorb, it is possible to avoid applying an unreasonable force to the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and damage to the second production operation unit 400A, etc. Can be prevented. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or struck by a strong force, the operation is performed. Since the button 410, the second effect operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and prevent damage. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, as compared with the case of a flat plate shape. The strength and rigidity are high, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back surface side thereof. The decoration due to the unevenness of the 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the like can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) (see FIG. 63). In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part at the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411 by the decoration of the concavo-convex combination of the triangles. The inner peripheral surface of the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device are behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rearward in the central axis CL direction). A gap is formed between the screen unit 470 and the outer periphery of the screen unit 470, and the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap allows the front side (the player side) to move to the outside or the rear side of the screen unit 470. The member of can be made invisible. Thereby, even if the door frame side second effect display device 460A is provided in the operation button 410 that can be pressed, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from being deteriorated, and the player who sees the operation button 410 can It is possible to prevent discomfort, and the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be arranged in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the operation button 410 can be made to look good.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the door frame side second effect display device 460A by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the button frame 412. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like, which are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, and the like, pass through the transparent button lens 411 from the player side. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, the upper and lower outer sides of the main screen 471, the left outer side of the peripheral decoration portion 472 a of the sub-screen 472, and the right side of the peripheral decoration member 478. The outer part (the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76) is made invisible to the player.

  On the other hand, in the state of the second position in which the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, a portion outside the annular peripheral decoration portion 472a of the sub screen 472 (a cross hatch portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 76). ), But is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the inside of the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472. It can be hidden, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the entire second effect operation unit 400A can be improved.

  Further, when the main screen 471 is in the first position in which the main screen 471 faces forward, the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472 is configured by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. Also, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the rotation of the main screen 471, and the like. Therefore, when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, the operation is performed. The movement that exceeds the expectation of the player in the button 410 can have a strong impact on the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the sub-screen 472 is in the second position in which the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are configured by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412, and the like. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) is rotatable, so that it is possible to increase the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated. It can entertain the player.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A, in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged on the rear side of the operation button 410, from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side. To the door frame side second effect display, which is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a in which a plurality of triangular surfaces are combined within a predetermined width range, and which is arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 The device 460A is provided with a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square pyramids are arranged in an array, and a peripheral decoration member 478. As a result, the triangular decoration (first button decoration portion 411a) arranged on the front side and the rectangular decoration (peripheral decoration portion 472a and peripheral decoration member 478) arranged on the rear side are overlapped so as to intersect with each other. It is possible to show the player a complicated geometric pattern, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of the triangle and the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478 mainly composed of the quadrangle are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. When the positions move, the overlapping degree of them changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed to show the moving decoration to the player, and at the same time, the decoration with a three-dimensional feeling with depth can be displayed. Can be shown to entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward or the sub screen. The 472 can be turned forward, and the decoration made of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral edge decoration portion 472a and the peripheral edge decoration member 478 are vertically separated from each other, and extend vertically. A decoration with a geometric pattern in which a decoration composed of a plurality of quadrangular pyramids arranged vertically crosses a decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape of the first button decoration part 411a in the button lens 411. It can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration portion 472a is in a state of extending in an annular shape, and the decoration including a plurality of square pyramids arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible for the player to see the geometric pattern decoration overlapping the decoration formed of a plurality of triangles arranged in an annular shape on the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Therefore, since the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed by rotating the screen unit 470, the change of the decoration attracts the player's attention to the operation button 410, or changes the decoration. The change can be made to suggest the arrival of a chance to the player, which can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen having a different switchable screen (main screen 471 and sub screen 472) on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 for projecting and displaying the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, it is possible to display an effect image that is completely different from the display of the effect image on the liquid crystal display device, which has a strong impact on the player. Can be given to entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a disc-shaped sub-screen 472 having a relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 at the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. It is provided so as to be spaced apart in the circumferential direction by 90 degrees about the axis.

  Then, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the state of the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the central axis of the semi-cylindrical shape is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is radiated forward from the projector 500 arranged behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75 (a)), and is translucent milky white. Through the main screen 471, the effect image projected from the front side can be visually recognized. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is also curved in a semi-cylindrical shape on the display screen. As a result, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from that, and to surprise the player, and also to let the player pay attention to the main screen 471, and to enjoy the effect image projected and displayed on the main screen 471. be able to.

  On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position with the sub-screen 472 facing forward, the disk-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and when viewed from the front, the circular operation button 410 has a circular shape. It seems that the sub-screen decoration member 476 imitating a skull is positioned in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is projected forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, since a flat plate-shaped non-translucent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, an effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 at this sub-screen decoration substrate 477. Thus, the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected on the central portion of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75 (b)). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected. At this time, when the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is made to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be made to emit light by the light, and the sub-screen provided at the center of the sub-screen 472 can be decorated. The screen decoration member 476 can be illuminated. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made invisible, and the front surface of the sub-screen 472 can be made invisible. The entire side can be brightly illuminated and decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light in a state where the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed to the front, and an effect image (moving image) is forwarded from the projector 500. When illuminated, the effect image is displayed on the part of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on the part outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 which is a decoration imitating skull, and the effect image is displayed. The sub-screen decoration member 476 on the inner side of is illuminated and decorated by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and a decoration effect completely different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machines. It can be shown to the player, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. Further, in this state, since the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (higher in brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, a partially high effect image which cannot be achieved by the conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that can further entertain the player can be displayed.

  As described above, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. With this, since the player can see the decoration with movement and a three-dimensional effect, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  In addition, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as effect images to the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front side in the rear of the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) or to the front side. The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the interior of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  Also, behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410, the operation button left outside decoration board 422 in the decoration board unit 420. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are light-emitted and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is located between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be favorably illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the second LED 422b of the operation button left outside decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outside of the frame button 415, behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, By making a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482 emit light, the frame top lens 418 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A arranged inside and behind the operation button 410. It is possible to display the effect image by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and to present the player with an effect that the shape of the display screen changes (switches), which is not possible with conventional pachinko machines. , Can give the player a great impact and entertaining.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 78C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 78 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320 so as to cover the front side. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent element that is arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and has a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper portion of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decoration base 534 and the left unit decoration lens member are attached from the front side to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531. The left unit lower decorative base 535, which is shorter than the decorative base 534 and projects forward in a frame shape, and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 mounted on the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 mounted on the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located at the substantially vertical center when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusion lens member 532 has a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in a front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in a front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. By the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a central diffuse reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases on the outer side of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflector 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflecting portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape in which the peaks are pointed rearward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis line extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions) and travels from the center side to the outside along the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflector 532c travels from the center side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflector 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side to the outside in the rectangular lens portion 532b substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the front reflection portion 532f causes the light to move forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface thereof moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 81). Accordingly, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

  In the prismatic lens portion 532b, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are radially displaced so that concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b to the front has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate the light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the front surface of the polygonal lens portion 532b of the left unit decoration lens member can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular ornamental portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends before and after the depression. In the polyhedral decoration, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the multi-faceted decorative portion is forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light emitted from the circular decorative portion forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light radiated to each of them causes a light emission decoration.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface on the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end such that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left portion is left. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, and the lower part of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

  The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86 and the like. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 82C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 82 (a). FIG. 86 (a) is a sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and FIG. 86 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the front side of the right unit base 551 on the left side of the front center of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extends in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member The transparent unit right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in a front view and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in the front surface of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and is shallow in the vertical direction and the front-back direction with the front and right sides opened. A box-shaped opaque right unit left light-shielding member 559, and a light opaque attached on the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decoration members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically pass through the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and extends in a rectangular tube shape that is short in the front-rear direction and is formed in a box shape in which the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction is closed. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip plate shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is a left LED 552a mounted on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, a right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and mounted on the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for allowing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decorative lens member 561 emit light.

  The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame lower right side decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in front view of the rear wall portion 553b to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side in front view of the main body portion 553a. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to house 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and is provided in plurality in the up-down direction, on the right side in front view of the main body portion 553a. The input lens portion 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view, in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 when assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emits light favorably by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is vertically divided into six equal parts. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body portion 553a.

  The side surface reflection portion 553f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line that extends radially around the input lens portion 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is formed on the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right when viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface of the body portion 553a (side surface reflection portion 553f), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light that is emitted from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side and left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is left. The light that has been reflected toward one side and passed through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left, so that the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  In the side surface reflection portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are displaced in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with uniform light and shade. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion of the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in a front view in a short flat plate shape. A portion 556b, a rear wall portion 556b, a notch portion 556c which is notched in a quadrangular shape from the left end side in a front view to the right side, and is formed at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction; A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decoration member 557, an input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a main body portion 553a that is substantially the same in outer shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 86, the entire main body portion 556a is moved to the left as viewed from the front as it goes from the rear end side to the front side with respect to the vertical line of the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

  The rear wall portion 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end thereof extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state where the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. This allows the light from the right LED 552b to be input so as to be widely diffused within the main body 556a.

  The side surface reflection portion 556f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arcuate grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e, and has a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side. , The whole is formed in a saw shape. In addition, the side surface reflecting portion 556f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it moves toward the front. The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration substrate 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface inside the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light blocking member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right shading member 560 The light that has been reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  In the side surface reflection portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. Therefore, it is possible to irradiate the light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side in the front view of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is visible. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in a side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. The wall portion 559b is cut out in a quadrangular shape from the right end side in a front view to the left side, and a plurality of notch portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

  The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

  The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light blocking member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of them corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets with a pair of the reinforcing portions 559d that are separated from each other in the vertical direction at the same height as the left and right widths and are separated from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light-shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the vertically extending quadrangular front end is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening that is open to the right of the right unit left light blocking member 559 formed in a shallow box shape when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. Light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

  Further, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each of the divided spaces because the internal space is divided into four vertically by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 that is used can prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550 can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be independently illuminated and decorated.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after the depression. In the multifaceted decoration portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of polygonal polygons each having a plurality of triangles are vertically arranged on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

  More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multifaceted decorative portion 561b are divided into four spaces by the three reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. Of the three parts from the top in the front part, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged one on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the up-down direction, and the multi-faced decoration part 561b is arranged at the lowermost part. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both right and left outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decoration lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decoration base 562 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to be able to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes forward in a plate shape larger than the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on the protruding left and right both sides, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be used as a light emission decoration.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed on the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing on the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he / she is playing in a private room, and other surrounding players can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the gaming hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment is not installed. The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90. FIG. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the back. It is a perspective view. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 87. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 in the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 at the center in the left-right direction and at the left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and extending in the left-right direction, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573, which are box-shaped with the rear open, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Plural (three in each left and right) slips that extend in each direction and penetrate each in the front-rear direction and are spaced vertically. A unit main body 271 that has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572 and that is mounted on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and has a pair of openings 574a that are closed. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576, and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 are closed and the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 are respectively closed. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides, respectively, and covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578. The top right decoration lens member 580, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side of the top middle decoration member 576, and the openings 574a are formed from both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576. A top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 respectively extending to the vicinity of the center side end part of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are open, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and provided with a plurality of LEDs 586a, 587a at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decoration board 586, door frame top middle right decoration board 587, door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and door frame top middle left decoration board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit cover so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. And a lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape that is open rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, are obliquely attached such that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 are moved rearward so that the side closer to the left-right center of the door frame top unit 570 moves rearward. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower portion near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends left and right, and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a quadrangle extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and a bottom portion having a half width of the quadrangle (the length in the left-right direction) centered on the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle. A trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 and the left and right ends of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 on both sides of the front portion at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions on the front surface from both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

  Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c that is cut out in a square shape from the rear end toward the front in the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d that is cut away from the rear end toward the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed so that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape of a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is located downward, and extends from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon to the outer side in the left-right direction. The right side of the pentagon and the lower ends of the right and left sides of the pentagon are connected to each other to form a substantially right triangle. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the variable pentagonal portion on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

  The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is arranged such that the front surface thereof is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining the side closer to the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side closer to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 has a straight portion that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction in the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction in the arc portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is decreased in the arc portion 578b so as to decrease toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b having a plurality of concavo-convex portions. Is equipped with.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

  Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

  In this way, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a, 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are juxtaposed left and right.

  The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit main body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up between the three decoration lens portions 579a of the top left decoration lens member 579 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the opening 574a on the right side of the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the door frame top unit 570 so as to fill the space between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in a state where the top middle right decoration member 582 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decorative lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, the LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. The LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 causes the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of the three light guide members 578 mounted on the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. The LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 allows the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 to be located via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The board base 585 includes a side wall having a side that is substantially square in a side view and a side that extends vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall of a quadrangle in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle is taken as a hypotenuse and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall.An upper wall of the right triangle that connects the lower side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and the upper and lower hypotenuses are open to form a triangular prismatic box. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. To the board base 585, the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached so that the open portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 is a state where the front surface of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled with the door frame top unit 570 and the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction are formed. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570 so that the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 that is attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction are formed in a state where the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, with the plurality of LEDs 587a facing forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing a portion of the top right decoration lens member 580 near the top middle decoration member 576 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to make the player illusion that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative members 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Accordingly, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by the speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near where the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are arranged. Since the upper speaker 573 is provided, and the speaker cover 575 faces forward from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically separated from each other, the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the front and rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (a second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (the part below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). ing. As a result, since the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction seems to be largely projected forward, the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously highlighted to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

  In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, and the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently comfortable. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 having a large diameter which is substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320 and bulging forward in a round shape, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward in a round shape, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed favorably even from the front side, and the operation button 410 with good operability can further enhance the effect using the operation button 410.

  Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations in accordance with the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower tray 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower tray opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. It can be recognized by touch that the volume of the lower plate 322 is larger than that.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c from which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the plate unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish ball removal hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower plate bowl removal hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls released from the upper plate 321 and the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like when entering the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to restrain the player from degrading the interest by devoting himself / herself to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

  Further, in the lower plate 322, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a at a position on the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the lower plate 322 on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a is raised. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected by the wall portion on the right side. As a result, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326, which the lower plate 322 faces forward, between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his or her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass sound from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e. It is possible to entertain people and suppress a decline in interest.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is largely plate-shaped and projects forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine which is adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. This makes it possible to give the illusion of being a player, and allows other players around to play the game in a relaxed atmosphere.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely projects to the front, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a line in a game hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can notify the existence of the pachinko machine 1 from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 above the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a middle middle decoration member in the door frame top unit 570 is more than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576. The front surface on both the left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concave shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, so that the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, The middle decoration member 576 can be strongly noticed.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other on the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is highly appealing to the player, and the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of them has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration on the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous, and a sophisticated feeling of decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600, a part of which can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are also provided. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 in front view are provided. .

  Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the lower front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launching device 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. And a locking unit 700 for locking the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main frame base 600 mounted on the rear side along the upper side and the left side in a front view. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out game balls to the player side, a board unit 900 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and an openable and closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base]
The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, as shown in FIGS. 91 to 94. This main body frame base 600 penetrates in the front and rear in a range of a height of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion port 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a game. A game board placing portion 602 which forms the lower side of the board insertion opening 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and the left and right ends of the lower end of the game board 5 which project upward from the center of the game board placing portion 602 in the left-right direction. And a game board regulation unit 603 that regulates the backward movement.

  In addition, the main body frame base 600 is a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a launching device mounting portion 604 on the right side in front view. A cylinder insertion opening 605 which penetrates the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted, and a front and rear penetrating front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in the front view, and the door of the substrate unit 900. A connection opening 606 for exposing the frame relay board 911 to the front and a circular shape for penetrating the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 to the front through the front and rear sides on the lower left side in a front view of the game board placing section 602. And a speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends backward from the right side of the game board insertion opening 601 in a plate shape, the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is attached. Further, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower end portions on the rear surface at the left end in front view, and is attached to the upper hinge for mounting the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attachment portion 610 are provided.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 is rotatably attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be openable and closable, and a position slightly lower on the left side of the left-right center of the game board mounting portion 602 in a front view. , A game board lock member 616 capable of restricting forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion opening 601.

[4-2. Body frame upper hinge member and body frame lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 609 and the lower hinge mounting portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and a columnar shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main frame upper hinge pin 622 pivotally supported by the cage outer frame upper hinge member 60, and the upper hinge main body 621 penetrates on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 622 in a front view, and pivotally supports the door frame upper hinge member 140. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame for. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion of the upper hinge body 621 that is bent downward.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at a front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and a lower hinge first main body 641 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. An outer frame lower hinge hole (not shown) axially supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a flat plate that is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 and extends horizontally. Hinge main body 643 in which the rear part of the plate-like plate member is bent upward in an L shape, and a lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3 that penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643. The door frame hinge hole 644 for pivotally supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend upward from the left end on the rear side. A restriction piece 645 for restricting the rotation range of the .

  In the lower hinge second main body 643, a horizontally extended portion is spaced above the horizontally extended portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 by a certain distance, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion of the main body 641 that is bent upward. The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600 at a portion where the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge second main body 643 are bent upward.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, in the reinforcing frame 660, on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end, the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 601 of the main body frame base 600 is restricted from moving forward and downward. A pair of left positioning members 661 are attached vertically separated from each other.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600, and the inside of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) is passed from the left side between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 680 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launching device 680 is a device for driving the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In this ball launching device 680, the driving strength of the game ball changes according to the turning angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the launching device mounting portion 604 of the main body frame base 600, and a flat plate-shaped launching base 681. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a batting mallet 683 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a diagonally upward leftward extension from the vicinity of the tip of the batting mallet 683. It is equipped with a launch rail 684 which is attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and on which a game ball can roll.

  In this ball launching device 680, game balls are supplied from the ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the upper surface of the launch rail 684, and the game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. Then, when the handle 302 is rotated, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength according to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting mallet 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hitting mallet 683 is guided into the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  In addition, when the hit game ball does not reach within the game area 5a due to the hitting strength of the game ball or the like, between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 275 of the lower foul cover unit 270, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower tray 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4, and can lock the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rearward extending portion 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically, and a plurality of locking units 700 projecting forward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 702, a plurality of outer frame hooks 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and protruding forward in a cylindrical shape from the lower part of the unit base 701, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in the direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door is rotated according to the rotation direction of the key. And a key cylinder 710 for unlocking the lock of either the frame hook 702 or the outer frame hook 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 95 to 113. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the payout unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. Further, FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as disassembled and seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line Q-Q in (a). Further, FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is closed by the ball removing movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the ball removing passage is opened by the ball removing movable piece. Is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper tank bulb path unit disassembled and seen from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full-ball path unit disassembled as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is closed in the lower tank ball path unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the taxiway opening / closing door is opened. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIG. 95, FIG. 96, etc., the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to an upper portion of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 that is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600. It is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802, which stores game balls supplied from an island facility in a game hall (not shown) that extends to the left and right and is opened upward. It is provided with a tank rail 803 that extends left and right to guide the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, while guiding the game balls to the left, they are aligned in two rows in the front and rear by the ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) hanging swingably from above.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is mounted on the rear surface of the upper left side in the front view of the payout unit base 801, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. The payout device 830 that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and pays out the game balls guided by the ball guiding unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And are equipped with. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, the game balls are distributed in two rows, and from the payout device 830, the game balls are paid out one by one.

  Furthermore, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801, guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 to the lower side, and according to the stored state of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full tank ball route unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The normal guiding path 861 that guides the game ball forward to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 from the front end, and guides the game ball discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e to the front side of the door frame 3 The front end openings of the full tank guide path 862 and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 guided to the full tank receiving port 274 are formed in the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Sphere guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has an open rear side, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821, and has a front side open. 821 and the rear case 822, which are mounted between the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and partition the front case 821 and the rear case 822, and the front and rear ends of the front and rear cases 821 and 822 that penetrate the partition plate 823. An attached rod-shaped shaft member 824 and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and movable piece member rear rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and arranged in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826, and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 that is mounted in the front case 821 and that can detect the rotational positions of the pair of movable piece member fronts 825 and the pair of movable piece member rears 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that allows the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide outlet that allows the game balls to pass through at a position to the right of the left-right center of the bottom surface. 821b, a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c extends obliquely from the ball guide inlet 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the guide portion 821d along the left side of the front case 821. It is composed of a detection portion 821e that extends straight downward to the vicinity, and a meandering portion 821f that extends in a meandering shape from the detection portion 821e in the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 is provided with a cutout portion 821g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 has a ball guide inlet 822a that is open to allow the game balls to pass through in the upper portion of the right side surface, and a ball guide exit that is open to allow the game balls to pass at a position to the right of the center of the bottom surface in the horizontal direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guiding passage 822c extends obliquely from the ball guiding entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of the height from the introducing portion 822d along the left side of the rear case 822. It is composed of a detecting portion 822e that extends straight downward to the vicinity and a meandering portion 822f that extends in a meandering shape from the detecting portion 822e in the left and right widths of the rear case 822. Further, the rear case 822 is provided with a cutout portion 822g on the wall on the right side in front view of the detection portion 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is formed substantially symmetrically to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. There is.

  The front and rear ends of the shaft member 824 are attached to positions below the upper ends of the cutouts 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 has a vertically extending flat plate-shaped movable piece 825a, a shaft hole 825b which penetrates the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 825a. An extending portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, connecting the extending portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. The connecting portion 825d, the weight attaching portion 825e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 825c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 825c. It extends outward from the right end in a flat plate shape and extends outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the detection piece 825f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 825b, the movable piece member front 825 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. Then, the movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in a state where the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is projected into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g is The outer wall of the guide passage 821c (detection unit 821e) is in contact with the outer wall. The stopper piece 825g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from further rotating in the direction of protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the lower end of the movable piece 825a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in front view), the movable piece member front 825 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 825a to move toward the guide passage 821c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 825f at the front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a vertically movable flat plate-shaped movable piece 826a, a shaft hole 826b which penetrates in the front and rear at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 826a, and through which the shaft member 824 is inserted, and the movable piece 826a. An extending portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, connecting the extending portion 826c and the movable piece 826a, and extending in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. The connecting portion 826d, the weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the upper portion of the extending portion 826c and the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d, and has a through hole that penetrates back and forth, and the extending portion 826c. A flat plate extends outward from the right end, and a detection piece 826f that can be detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and a flat plate outward from a position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the shaft member 824 is passed through the shaft hole 826b, the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated by its own weight so that the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is located immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, when the ball guiding unit 820 is assembled, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch portion 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a projects into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g is removed. The state is in contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c (detection unit 822e). The stopper piece 826g comes into contact with the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, so that the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction projecting into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). In addition, when the lower end of the movable piece 826a is rotated in the direction of approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction when viewed from the front), the movable piece member rear 826 causes the left side surface of the movable piece 826a to move toward the guide passage 822c. It matches the inside. In this state, the detection piece 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 becomes non-detection.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied in a state in which a plurality of game balls are lined up in a row by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case are arranged in a state where the game balls are lined up in a row. By 822, it is possible to guide the dispensing device 830 below in a two-row state (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. You can

  Further, when the game sphere flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guiding unit 820, the game sphere comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are formed. The front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. As a result, the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are not detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, and it is understood that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guiding unit 820 pays out the game balls or the like, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c will flow downstream. When the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introducing portions 821d and 822d becomes strong, and the game ball flowing through the introducing portions 821d and 822d is a movable piece above the detecting portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a are vibrated by the contact of the game balls, the vibrations cause the movable pieces 825a and 826a to be sandwiched or intruded between the notch portions 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Dust, dust, etc. can be removed, and the movable pieces 825a, 826a can be favorably rotated by its own weight or the like.

  Further, the ball guiding unit 820 is configured to detect the game balls circulating in the respective guiding passages 821c and 822c by the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f of the movable piece member rear 826 is detected by the single out-of-ball detection sensor 827, when there is no game sphere in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable piece member front The movable piece 825a, 826a of 825 or the movable piece member rear 826 is rotated so as to project into the guide passages 821c, 822c, and the detection pieces 825f, 826f on the side where the game ball is lost are detected by the out-of-ball detection sensor 827. It Therefore, it is possible to detect the running out of the game ball early, so that the game ball can be quickly replenished, and the time when the game is interrupted is shortened as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, by screwing and attaching metal screws as weights to the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, the weights of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 and the weight are reduced. With the above, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the directions projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a, 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c, 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a, 826a, and the walls, so that their own weight, etc. With this, it is possible to satisfactorily rotate, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  In this way, in the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment, the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 whose lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e on the side opposite to the surface contacting the game ball, the movable piece is moved by the weight of the weight and the weight of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. The lower end sides of 825a and 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached outside the guide passages 821c and 822c so that the lower ends thereof project into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust inside the guide passages 821c and 822c is reduced. No dust or the like adheres to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate toward the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, and the like do not get caught between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall, so that the self-weight, etc. This allows the movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) to rotate satisfactorily and prevent the occurrence of a defect such that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes to be attached, even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are frequently rotated, the weight is The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (weight attachment portions 825e, 826e) do not come off, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time. .. In addition, the weight can be easily attached to the front movable piece member 825 and the rear movable piece member 826 by simply screwing a metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, so that the labor of attaching the weight can be simplified. Therefore, the cost for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, since the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided with the introduction portions 821d and 822d that guide the game balls toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a, on the upstream side of the site where the movable pieces 825a and 826a project inside. Since the game ball contacts the movable pieces 825a and 826a by flowing the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Therefore, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust, dirt, and the like that are sandwiched between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and that move by their own weight. The front one piece member 825 and the rear one piece member 826 can be rotated favorably.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated favorably, the state (presence or absence) of the game sphere in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected, and the game sphere It is possible to suppress the occurrence of defects due to erroneous detection and the like. Further, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a, so that it is possible to quickly The game balls can be replenished to the player, and the time when the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
The payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with an open rear side, and a payout opening 831a in which a game ball is opened in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a game ball is opened in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout exit 831b, a ball removal exit 831c in which a game ball is open near the right end of the bottom surface when viewed from the front, a payout passage 831d that allows the payout entrance 831a and the payout exit 831b to communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e that branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. In the box shape with the front side open, the payout opening 832a is formed in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass, and the game ball is near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. The payout outlet 832b that is openable excessively, the ball removal outlet 832c that is open to allow the game balls to pass near the right end in front view on the bottom surface, and the payout inlet 832a and the payout outlet 832b are in communication with each other and the game balls are distributed. The rear box 832 is provided with a possible payout passage 832d and a payout passage 832d that branches from the middle of the payout passage 832d and communicates with the ball removal outlet 832c and has a ball removal passage 832e through which game balls can flow.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-shaped front cover 833 whose rear side is open, and a rotation shaft which is attached inside the front box 831 and penetrates the front box 831. And a drive gear 835 attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshes with each other so that the front box 831 and the front cover 833 can rotate. The spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and the driven gear 837 are rotatably pierced so that the front end is attached to the front cover 833 and A shaft member 838 whose end penetrates the front box 831 and is attached to the rear box 832, and a shaft member 838 which is rotatably mounted through the shaft member 838 and which is attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. A payout blade 839 disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotating integrally with the driven gear 837, and a blade rotation detection sensor 840 attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 to detect the rotation of the payout blade 839. And are equipped with.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is mounted between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 for partitioning the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, which is attached between the payout vane 839 and the payout detection sensor 842 for detecting the game balls discharged from the payout outlets 831b and 832b, and the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passage. 831e and 832e are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 at a branching point, and the ball-removing movable piece 843 that can close the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e and the front box 831 and the rear box 831. A ball pulling lever 844 that is mounted slidably up and down on the upper right side surface of the box 832 as viewed from the front and that allows the ball pulling movable piece 843 to be rotatable or non-rotatable. It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 831a toward the ball exit 831c, and is downward at a height about 1/3 of the overall height of the front box 831. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located immediately above the dispensing outlet 831b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the front box 831 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 831b. The payout vane 839 is arranged at a portion bent in a crank shape in the payout passage 831d.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e is a form in which the portion of the delivery passage 831d that extends obliquely from the delivery opening 831a to the lower right is further extended, and the height from the upper surface is about 1/3 of the total height of the front box 831. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 831b in the dispensing passage 831d, and a guiding shelf 831f protruding rearward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 831g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in a front view from the payout entrance 832a toward the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about ⅓ of the total height of the rear box 832. Bends so as to extend vertically, and bends so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the overall height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right width of the rear box 832 from the left end. As described above, it is bent in a crank shape so as to be located right above the dispensing outlet 832b at a height about 1/4 of the bottom of the rear box 832 and extends vertically to the dispensing outlet 832b. The payout vane 839 is arranged in a crank-shaped bent portion in the payout passage 832d.

  On the other hand, the ball-removing passage 832e further extends a portion of the payout passage 832d that extends obliquely from the payout opening 832a to the lower right, and is about 1/3 the height of the rear box 832 from the upper surface. It branches up to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed at a portion vertically extending toward the dispensing outlet 832b in the dispensing passage 832d, and a guide shelf 832f protruding forward as it goes downward, and an upper part of the right side surface in front view. And a lever mounting portion 832g for mounting the ball removing lever 844 slidably up and down.

  The payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The dispensing passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by the partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the dispensing blade 839 is arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. In other words, the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game ball that has flowed through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are located before and after the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. The payout detection sensor 842 is moved to the vicinity of the boundary and detected.

  The driven gear 837 radially protrudes from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an interval of 60 degrees from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. It is provided with a plurality of detection pieces 837b and a connecting portion 837c projecting rearward from the center of the gear portion 837a in a cylindrical shape and having irregularities formed on the peripheral surface at the rear end and capable of being connected to the payout blade 839. ..

  The payout vane 839 extends in the front-rear cylindrical shape and has a base tubular portion 839a through which the shaft member 838 is inserted, and protrudes in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a from the front end of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The plurality (three) of the front blades 839b and the rear end of the base tubular portion 839a protrude in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction so that the front blade 839b is staggered. 3) The rear blade 839c and the connected portion that is protruded in a tubular shape from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a to the front and has an unevenness that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Each of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c of the payout blade 839 is provided at three intervals at an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blade 839c and the rear blade 839c are arranged so as to be staggered. It is offset at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. In the payout blade 839 of the present embodiment, the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) are connected by an arc depressed toward the center side, and the diameter of the arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball storage portion 839e capable of storing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blade 839c are formed such that their outer diameters D1 around the axis of the base tubular portion 839a are 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. Further, a diameter D2 about the axis of the base tubular portion 839a up to the portion closest to the axis of the base tubular portion 839a in the arcuate portion (sphere housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). Is formed to be about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1 to 0. It is quadrupled.

  Therefore, about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer circumference of the game ball can be held by the arc-shaped portion (ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, it is possible to accommodate a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball. As a result, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly stored between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (ball storage portion 839e).

  In the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, with the dispensing device 830 assembled, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the trailing blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832. The game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. Further, the payout blade 839 is arranged in the payout passages 831d and 832d at a portion that is bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below the portion vertically extending downward from the vicinity of the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Then, in the crank-shaped bent portions of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the dispensing blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the dispensing blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in an arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In this embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball storage portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. ..

  As a result, the payout device 830 passes through the crank-shaped bent portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d when the game balls flowing down onto the payout blade 839 come into contact with the outer circumferences of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. Therefore, it cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is housed in the ball housing portion 839e, it moves with the rotation of the payout blade 839, and can pass through the crank-shaped bent parts of the payout passages 831d and 832d, and from the payout exits 831b and 832b. It is released downward.

  Further, in the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is set to about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the outer diameter of the game ball is set to 1 by the ball housing portion 839e. Since the depth of / 7 to 1/4 is accommodated, it is possible to shorten the time required for accommodating the game ball while reducing the outer diameter of the payout blade 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout vane 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be stored in the ball storage portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Therefore, the number of payouts of the game balls per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time taken to pay out the game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends vertically and longitudinally in a plate shape, and has a body portion 843a whose lower portion is bent and is formed in a V shape in a front view, and a cylindrical portion which extends forward and backward at the upper end of the body portion 843a. A shaft cylinder portion 843b, both ends of which are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832, a projecting portion 843c projecting from an upper portion of an outer surface of the main body portion 843a, which is bent in a V shape, and a main body portion 843a. And a weight attachment portion 843d (see FIG. 105) formed of a through hole penetrating forward and backward in a lower portion bent in a V shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is oriented such that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the shaft cylinder portion 843b at the upper end dispenses the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to rotate at a portion obliquely extending from the payout entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view and at a position outside the wall on the right side in the front view, which is slightly higher than the portion that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the dispensing device 830 of the present embodiment is in a state in which the ball-pulling lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower part of the ball-pulling lever 844 hits the projecting portion 843c of the ball-pulling movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. Touching. As a result, the ball-removable movable piece 843 is restricted from rotating counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 105 (a)).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a of the ball-removable movable piece 843 that is bent in a V shape, the upper side of the bent portion extends vertically, and the lower side of the bent portion is the front left oblique lower left. Extending to. The lower end of the main body portion 843a is located in the vicinity of a portion where the payout passages 831d and 832d and the ball passage passages 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 (main body 843a) closes the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and the left-side surface of the main body 843a forms part of the walls of the payout passages 831d and 832d. is doing.

  In the normal state, the ball-stripping movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that the center of gravity of the ball-shedding movable piece 843 is located on the left side in a front view of a vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front is exerted by it, since the counterclockwise rotation is restricted by the ball pulling lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removing lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower part of the ball removing lever 844 is separated from the protruding portion 843c of the ball removing movable piece 843, and the ball removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view. Movement restrictions are lifted. Therefore, the ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft tube portion 843b. It should be noted that the ball-removable movable piece 843 must be rotated counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body 843a comes into contact with the left surfaces of the members forming the right side surfaces of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). Thereby, the ball removal passages 831e, 832e are opened, and the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a, 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d, 832d. The ball-removing movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise as viewed from the front to open the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, flow through the opened ball-removing passages 831e and 832e, and are discharged downward from the ball-removing outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removing movable piece 843 is provided with the weight attaching portion 843d, the weight including the metal screw is screwed into the weight attaching portion 843d so as to slide the ball removing lever 844 upward. When the regulation of counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 is projected into the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the weight of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. Direction (counterclockwise as viewed from the front) can be easily rotated.

  Also, in a normal state in which the ball removing lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removing passages 831e, 832e, the game balls entering from the payout ports 831a, 832a enter the main body 843a of the ball removing movable piece 843. Since they are in contact with each other, the ball-moving movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to remove dust, dust, or the like that is sandwiched between the lower end of the ball-removing movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e by the vibration of the ball-removing movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball-removing movable piece 843 from being unable to rotate due to biting of dust or the like.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight can be screwed and attached to the weight attachment portion 843d formed as the through hole, even if the ball removing movable piece 843 is frequently rotated, the weight is removed by the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state for a long period of time without coming off from the (weight attachment portion 843d). In addition, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball-moving movable piece 843 simply by screwing a metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost related to can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removing passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long period of time by the ball removing movable piece 843, fine dust may be attached to the rotating shaft of the ball removing movable piece 843 or the rotating shaft may be rusted. The removal movable piece 843 may be difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout ports 831a and 832a come into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball-removing movable piece 843, so the ball-removing movable piece 843 removes the ball-removing passage 831e. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball pulling lever 844 for releasing the closing is slid upward and unlocked, the game ball comes into contact with the ball removing movable piece 843. The ball-removing movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball-removing passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be favorably rotated, so that the game ball removal work can be reliably performed. It is possible to improve workability in maintenance and the like.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper tank ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. The upper tank bulb path unit 850 is attached to a position below the payout device 830 in the payout unit base 801. The upper full tank path unit 850 is attached to the payout unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 851, and the upper full tank base 851 is attached to the rear side and the front side is opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a dispensing device pressing member 853 rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper tank ball path unit 850 is an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass in a left side portion from the left-right center in the front view on the upper surface, and a right side from the center in the front view on the upper surface. It is formed between the upper full tank base 851 and the upper full tank cover 852, and is received by the upper payout ball receiving opening 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c of a predetermined size through which game balls circulate, a normal discharge opening 850d that opens downward at a position immediately below the upper payout sphere receiving opening 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and the upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e that opens downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d, and a full tank discharge port 850e. And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion to the left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  In addition, the upper tank ball passage unit 850, the upper ball removal passage 850g that guides the game ball that entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and the upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. And a ball removal outlet 850h. This upper tank full ball path unit 850 has a normal outlet 850d, a tank outlet 850e, and an upper ball outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side in a front view and opens downward. Further, the upper tank full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover mounting portion 854 for mounting the back cover 980 on the right end of the upper tank base 851.

  In the state where the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball extracting entrance 850b. Are located immediately below the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full-ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full-tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guideways of the lower full-ball path unit 860. Each of 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 has an opening right above the rear end opening (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper tank ball path unit 850, the game balls that are paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In the state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper ball storage passage 850c is not closed, the game ball that has entered the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. It is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d.

  When the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be stored, and further, the normal guiding path 861 of the lower tank ball path unit 860 is filled with the game balls, it is normally released. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when the game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of game balls stored above the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than the partition 850f, the game balls newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c pass the partition 850f and become full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower tray 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860.

  In this way, the upper tank ball path unit 850 automatically lowers the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower tank ball path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 108 to 112. The lower tank full ball path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper tank ball path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full tank path unit 860 guides the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 to the front and guides the game ball from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 861. And, a full tank guide path 862 that guides the game balls discharged from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front and guides them from the front end to the full tank receiver port 274 of the door frame 3, and normally. A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens / closes front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 in accordance with opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and a guideway opening / closing door 863 that is a normal guideway 861 and a full guide path 862. A closing spring 864 that urges the front end opening of the same in a direction to close the opening.

  In addition, the lower tank full ball path unit 860 guides the game balls discharged from the upper ball exit port 850h of the upper tank ball path unit 850 to the front, and from the center right end in the front-rear direction on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900. It is provided with a lower ball guideway 865 for discharging to

  In the lower tank full ball path unit 860, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are sequentially arranged from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball removing guide path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are lined up on the left and right, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side becomes low. Further, the full tank guideway 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guideway 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guide path 861, the full tank guide path 862, and the lower ball guide path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that are vertically separable.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower case 867 between the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and is rotated clockwise in a front view by a closing spring 864. Being energized. More specifically, at the front end of the lower tank ball path unit 860, the full tank guide path 862 opening to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view is one game with respect to the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the ball. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The taxiway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-shaped base portion 863a that is rotatably attached, and a first door plate portion 863b that extends in a flat plate shape from the base portion 863a to the diagonally upper left side and can close the front end opening of the taxiway path 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending from the base portion 863a to the right side in a flat plate shape and capable of closing the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. , And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end portion of the extending portion 863d and can come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 means that the openings do not have to be closed and the game ball may not pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end face is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. is doing.

  The guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863c is provided below the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the front end of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1 has a through ball passage 273, a full ball socket 274, and a door opening / closing member in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). The guideway opening / closing door 863 has no contact with the actuating projection 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the guideway opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Is rotated clockwise in a front view, and the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state of being in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are located in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Therefore, in this state, the game balls in the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening, and even if the door frame 3 is opened, the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guide The game ball does not spill out of the path 862.

  Then, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing abutting portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operating protrusion 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 to operate. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts against the biasing force of the closing spring 864 to rotate the guideway opening / closing door 863 in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c that have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 rotate in the direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861. Also, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111 (b)). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is located below the front end opening of the normal guideway 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is located above the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862. ..

  When the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank path are full. The penetrating ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide passage 862. The game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 are changed by vertically changing the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862, and by rotating the guide path opening / closing door 863. Since it is opened and closed, the operating range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be narrowed as much as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  In the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with the game balls, and the game balls cannot be discharged to the upper plate 321. When is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guide path 861 of the lower full tank ball route unit 860 is filled with the game balls. Then, when the game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guideway 861 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper tank ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition 850f, it will flow to the full tank discharge port 850e side, and from the full tank discharge port 850e, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, The payout of gaming balls is automatically switched to the lower plate 322 through the foul cover unit 270. After that, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830, and the lower plate 322 in addition to the upper plate 321 is filled with the game balls and the lower plate 322 cannot be supplied with the game balls, the foul cover unit 270. The game balls are stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable balls 278 are rotated by the game balls being stored in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. Is notified, and the payout of the game balls by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  In addition, the stop of the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 in response to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. The number of storage passages 277 on the upstream side, the full tank guiding path 862 of the lower full tank ball path unit 860, and the upper spherical storage path 850c of the upper full ball ball path unit 850 that can be filled in the above state. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in a conventional pachinko machine, so in the gaming state where a large number of game balls are paid out, such as during the big hit game state, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are paid out by the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to pay attention to the fact that the player is full of game balls, and allow the player to concentrate on the big hit game state and entertain.

[4-7. Board unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass sound mounted on the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 in front view. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view and housing a power supply board therein, and a speaker unit 920 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 An interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of gaming balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950, .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 mounted on the front surface of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board mounted on the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. It is for. The payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950 controls the payout device 830.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a passage through which game balls are distributed by the distribution member 2011. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and the game panel. A peripheral control unit mounted on the rear side of 1100, and a game board side effect display device 1600 which is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image are configured. ing. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000, and also holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and thus the front component member 1000. A frame-shaped panel holder that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit is attached to the rear surface. The back unit is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has a box-like shape that is open to the front and has a square opening in the rear wall. The display device 1600 is configured to include a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the display device 1600.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is arranged at substantially the center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variable game in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols respectively included in a plurality of symbol columns (three columns in the present embodiment) are variably displayed is executed and executed in association with the variable game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display device 1403 including eight LEDs and a second special symbol display device 1405 including eight LEDs. Has been done. In the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405, the symbol variation for changing and displaying the special symbol is performed. The special symbol is a symbol for notification showing the result of determination (big hit determination) whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit. Then, in the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation in which the special symbol is varied and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 is started. It is supposed to be executed as one game. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed on the first special symbol display 1403 may be referred to as "first side symbol variation", and the symbol variation performed on the second special symbol display 1405 may be referred to as "second side symbol variation". Sometimes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is started, from among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol), the big hit determination using which special symbol is performed. Is selected. Then, when the big hit determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the control for starting the symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the big hit determination is performed. (Main control board 1310). In the symbol fluctuation started in this way, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the big hit judgment, the big hit pattern (big hit display result), which is the special symbol stop mode that can recognize the big hit, and the small hit. Either a small hit pattern (small hit display result) that is a stop mode of a special symbol that can recognize a hit, or a deviating pattern (deviation display result) that is a stop mode of a special symbol that can recognize a deviance appears. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether the player has won the big hit, the small hit, or the lose (miss). It should be noted that, when the jackpot pattern is stopped in the form of appearing, a jackpot game in which a player can obtain a prize ball is awarded. In addition, when the small hitting design is stopped in the form of appearing, the small hitting game where the player can obtain the prize ball is granted.

  On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured with a display area larger than each of the symbol display devices 1403 and 1405, and in each of the display areas, a plurality of symbol columns (three columns in the present embodiment) are provided. A plurality of types of included decorative designs (a plurality of types of numbers) are displayed larger than the special designs.

  Then, on the game board side effect display device 1600, display results corresponding to the display results of the respective symbol display devices 1403 and 1405 are displayed. More specifically, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, a special symbol combination is also displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 (for all columns). When the symbol combination is the same symbol) is confirmed and stopped, and the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 is displayed as a small hit symbol, the game board side effect display device is displayed. Also in 1600, a special symbol combination different from that at the time of a big hit (a symbol combination in which the symbols in all the columns are the same symbol) is fixedly stopped and displayed, and the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405 is displaced. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the game board side effect display device 1600 also has a symbol combination at the time of losing (the symbols in all columns are not the same symbol). Such as pattern combination) is determined stopped and displayed. Thereby, the player can more easily recognize whether the big hit, the small win, or the defeat (lost) is confirmed by checking the variable game played on the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be able to.

  Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of the left column → the right column → the middle column when viewed from the player side, and two specific columns (in the present embodiment, If the same decorative pattern precedes and is stopped and displayed in the left and right two columns), the reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, the left row of the plurality of symbol rows is the first stop row, the right row is the second stop row, the middle row is the third stop row, and the left row and the right row are the reach forming rows that form the reach state. Becomes

  Here, the "temporary stop display" is something that can appear during a period in which the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 are kept in a changing state, and the game board side. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative pattern is displayed in a fluctuation state. On the other hand, the "fixed stop display" means that when the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, or it can appear after that, the game board side In the display area of the effect display device 1600, any of the decorative symbols does not fluctuate and is stopped.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 is further provided with a first LED including two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game balls into the first left starting opening 2002a and the first right starting opening 2002b. By the special reserve number indicator 1404, the second special reserve number indicator 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the reserve number related to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, and the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of four LEDs for displaying the judgment result is provided, and a normal reservation display 1408 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. ing.

  Here, the first special hold number display 1404 informs the player of the number of memories of the big hit determination on the side of the first special symbol that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter, also referred to as the first reserve memory number). To do. The first reserved memory number is incremented by "1" by the game ball winning the first left starting opening 2002a or the first right starting opening 2002b arranged on the game board 5, while the first side symbol variation By starting, "1" is subtracted. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in the first starting opening 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol variation is performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to “4”) is accumulated.

  In addition, the second special reserved number display 1406 notifies the player of the number of stored jackpot determinations on the side of the second special symbol that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter, also referred to as the second reserved stored number). It is a thing. The second reserved memory number is incremented by "1" when the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while the second side symbol variation is started by "1". Is subtracted. Therefore, when the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2004 within the period in which the second side symbol variation is performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In this embodiment, up to “4”) is accumulated.

  Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (ordinary determination), a normal symbol variation for varying a plurality of types of normal symbols is performed based on the result of the ordinary determination. This normal symbol fluctuation, after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment, the normal hit symbol (ordinary hit display result) which is the stop mode of the normal symbol that can recognize the normal hit, and Ordinary symbol which is a mode of stopping normal symbols that can be recognized normally, and is stopped in the form of either one of the ordinary symbols (outlier display result), so that the player wins the ordinary hit or loses (ordinary loss) You will be able to recognize what you did. In addition, when the normal winning symbol is stopped in the form of appearing, the later-described normal electric winning port 2011 is opened.

  In addition, the normal hold display unit 1408 notifies the player of the number of storages of the normal determination (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of general-use hold storages) that is held in an unexecuted state. The number of stored ordinary figures is incremented by "1" when the game ball is received in the gate section 2003 arranged on the game board 5, while it is subtracted by "1" when the normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when the game ball is received in the gate unit 2003 within the period in which the normal symbol variation is being performed, the number of reserved universal memories is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (upper limit number of universal symbols, in the present embodiment). "4") is accumulated.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation are configured not to be executed at the same time, and symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation) When the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number are both "1" or more when is completed, the second side symbol variation based on the second reserved storage number is preferentially executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation) and normal symbol variation can be executed simultaneously.

[5-1. Board composition of game board]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.
As shown in FIG. 114, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a of the game board 5. Further, in the lower area of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, a first left starting opening 2002a in which a game ball hit on the left side of the center role object 2500 can be received, and the lowermost end of the game area 5a. An outlet 1003 for collecting the game balls that have flowed down to and discharging the game balls from the game area 5a is provided.

  Here, the first left starting opening 2002a is opened at the upper side, and it is possible to always receive the game ball hit on the left side of the center accessory 2500. The first left starting opening 2002a is arranged substantially right and left in the center of the game area 5a right below the central portion of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball emitted from the central portion of the stage 2530. Can be accepted with a high probability. The first left starting opening 2002a is provided with a first left starting opening sensor 4002a for detecting the received game ball.

  Further, in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, a distribution member 2011 for alternately distributing the game balls hit on the right side of the center role object 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, The first right starting opening 2002b and the second starting opening 2004 in which the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received, and the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 are allowed to pass. And a gate portion 2003. Further, in the area on the lower right side of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first big winning opening 2005 and Two major winning openings 2005b are provided.

  Although the details will be described later, the distribution member 2011 is a member that alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and the first right starting opening. 2002b can receive the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011. Similarly, in the gate portion 2003, the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2022 can pass. On the other hand, the second starting port 2004 can receive the game balls distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. And, the general winning opening 2001, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b can accept the game balls which are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is said that.

  In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) at a predetermined portion inside the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100, but at least a center role. There is an obstacle around the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 provided in the area on the right side of the object 2500, that is, around the gate portion 2003, the first right starting opening 2002b, the second starting opening 2004, and the second special winning opening 20052005b. No nails have been planted.

[5-1-1. About distribution member]
Next, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 will be described with reference to FIG. 115.
As shown in FIG. 115, the distribution member 2011 has two recesses each capable of holding a game ball, and positions for distributing the game ball to the first passage 2012 (FIG. 115 (A)). (The position shown in FIG. 115C) and the position where the game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014 (the position shown in FIG. 115C).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the left-side concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Get stuck. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (B), in the game ball that is fitted in the left concave portion of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates leftward due to the weight of the game ball, and the first passage 2012 is generated. Will be released to the side. At this time, the concave portion on the right side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), when the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Put in. Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), in the game ball fitted in the recess on the right side of the distribution member 2011, the distribution member 2011 rotates rightward due to the weight of the game ball, and the second passage entrance It will be discharged to the 2013 (second passage 2014) side. At this time, the concave portion on the left side of the distribution member 2011 is directed upward.

  In this way, after the game ball hit on the right side of the center character 2500 is distributed to the first passage 2012 side, the next game ball is distributed to the second passage 2014 side, and the center character object After the game ball hit on the left side of 2500 is distributed to the second passage 2014 side, the next game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side. That is, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is sure to be alternately allocated to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and one of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 It is designed so that multiple game balls are not continuously distributed to the side.

[5-1-2. Regarding the flow of game balls in the first passage and the second passage]
Next, the flow of the game balls distributed by the distribution member 2011 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and FIGS. 117 and 118 are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball.

  First, the game ball that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the right area ingress sensor 4006 before reaching the distribution member 2011. In this way, the right area entrance sensor 4006 is provided as a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, so that the first right starting opening 2002b, the gate section 2003, and the second starting. A game ball is struck on the right side of the center role object 2500 at a preferable time (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a time saving state) at which the mouth 2004, the first big prize hole 2005, and the second big prize hole 2005b should be aimed. It is possible to grasp whether or not there is.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 pass through the funnel 2017 formed in a funnel shape. In this way, since the clune 2017 is provided before the game balls reach the constant drive door 2021, the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, and then the constant drive door 2021. Although the distance to reach the constant drive door 2021 is constant, the time to reach the constant drive door 2021 is different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the drive door 2021 is always in the retracted state from being aimed at and prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the first right starting opening 2002b.

  Next, the game ball that has passed through the clune 2017 flows down on the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, but when the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, it enters the side of the first right starting opening 2002b. On the other hand, when the constant drive door 2021 is in a protruding state, the game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting opening 2002b (there is no possibility to enter the first right starting opening 2002b). It will flow down, bypassing the right side of the first right starting port 2002b. That is, when the game ball flows down the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, pay attention to whether or not the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the first right start opening 2002b. be able to.

  Then, the game ball that has entered the side of the first right starting opening 2002b from the constant drive door 2021 has a high probability that the first right starting opening 2002b is located immediately below the constant drive door 2021. Accepted by mouth 2002b. On the other hand, the game ball that has not been received in the first right starting port 2002b flows down either the right or left side of the first right starting port 2002b, and the right side of the first right starting port 2002b is always present when the drive door 2021 is in a protruding state. The game ball that has flown around by detouring will be merged and flowed down again.

  The above-mentioned first right starting opening 2002b is arranged on the side of the first passage 2012, and among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, when the drive door 2021 is always in the retracted state. It is possible to accept a game ball that has entered inside. The first right starting opening 2002b is provided with a first right starting opening sensor 4002b for detecting the accepted game ball.

  In addition, the constant drive door 2021 changes between a protruding state in which it is protruded forward by the constant drive solenoid 2107 and a retracted state in which it is retracted in the rear direction. The retracted state for 04 seconds is always repeated. In this way, among the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, by making the time during which the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state extremely shorter than the time during which it is in the protruding state. About 2/100 always enters the inside of the drive door 2021 and is accepted by the first right starting port 2002b. Although the details will be described later, during the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls are driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game balls enter the first special winning opening 2005, so about 2/100 described above. Even if so, it is possible to enter the ball into the first right starting opening 2002b during the jackpot gaming state.

  Next, the game balls that have joined without being accepted by the first right starting opening 2002b pass through the gate unit 2003 with a high probability because the gate unit 2003 is arranged immediately below the joining unit. In this way, after the game balls that have not been received by the first right starting opening 2002b merge, the game balls head toward the gate portion 2003, so that the game balls can be passed through the gate portion 2003 efficiently. On the other hand, the game ball that has not passed through the gate portion 2003 flows down on either the left or right side of the gate portion 2003, and joins with the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003 and flows down again.

  Here, the gate portion 2003 is arranged on the side of the first passage 2012, and allows the game balls distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution portion seat 2011 to pass through. This gate portion 2003 is arranged on the downstream side of the first passage 2012 with respect to the first right starting opening 2002b, and the first right starting opening regardless of whether the game ball has entered the inside of the drive door 2021 at all times. The first passage 2012 is formed so that the game balls that are not accepted by 2002b pass with a high probability. Note that the gate unit 2003 is provided with a gate sensor 4003 that detects a game ball that has passed.

  Next, the game balls that have joined regardless of whether they have passed through the gate portion 2003 will be guided to the upper side of the second starting port 2004, but the passage in that part is in the lower left direction (opposite to the inlet 2016). Since it is inclined in the direction), it does not enter the receiving port 2016 (does not allow the ball to enter the second starting port 2004) and bypasses the left side of the second starting port 2004 and flows down. It will be.

  Then, the game ball that has flown around the left side of the second starting port 2004 and flows down, that is, the game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 but has not entered the first right starting port 2002b is the second big winning port 2005b. When the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is received by the second special winning opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the projecting state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is inclined to the lower left direction. A game ball will be discharged to the side of the first special winning opening 2005 along.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117, the game balls distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011 enter the second passage entrance 2013 to the inner side, and enter the first passage. It flows down through a second passage 2014 (hatched portion) provided on the back side of 2012, and is discharged forward from the second passage outlet 2015. As shown in FIG. 118, the second passage 2014 is provided with a sawtooth-shaped step, but by providing such a sawtooth-shaped step, the distribution member 2011 causes the second passage inlet 2013 (first The time from when the game balls are distributed to the side of the two passages 2014) to when the game balls reach the second starting opening door 2022 is different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state from being aimed at, and prevent the timing at which the ball can enter the second starting opening 2004 from being aimed.

  Next, the game ball discharged forward from the second passage outlet 2015 enters the reception port 2016 with a high probability because the receiving port 2016 is arranged immediately below the second passage outlet 2015. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the receiving port 2016, the game ball does not enter the side of the second starting port 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004). It will flow down, bypassing the right side of the entrance 2016.

  At this time, the game ball that has entered the receiving opening 2016 is guided to the side of the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door 2022 is in a protruding state, and is received by the second starting opening 2004. On the other hand, when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball is not guided to the side of the second starting opening 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second starting opening 2004). , And passes through the front of the second starting opening door 2022 in the retracted state, and flows down. In other words, when the game ball enters from the receiving port 2016, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the second starting port 2004. it can. Then, such a game ball will merge again with the game ball that has flowed down by bypassing the right side of the inlet 2016 and will flow down.

  Here, the second starting port 2004 is arranged on the side of the second passage 2103, and enters the game ball distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distributing member 2011, that is, the second passage entrance 203 and enters the second passage. Among the game balls released from the passage outlet 2015, the game balls enter the receiving port 2016, and it is possible to receive the guided game balls when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state. The second starting port 2004 is provided with a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting the accepted game ball.

  The second starting opening door 2022 changes between a protruding state in which it is projected forward by the second starting opening solenoid 2108 and a retracted state in which it is retracted in the rear direction, and is normally in the retracted state. On the other hand, depending on the result of the normal determination that is drawn by the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003, that is, when the result of the normal determination is “universal hit”, the retracted state is changed to the protruding state. It is changing. The second starting opening door 2022 is arranged immediately below the second passage exit 2015 and the receiving opening 2016, and is discharged from the second passage exit 2015 when the second starting opening door 2022 is in a projecting state and received. It is possible to receive the game ball that has entered 2016 and guide the game ball toward the second starting port 2004 located on the left side of the second starting port door 2022. On the other hand, when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state, the second starting opening door 2022 is passed through the front side of the second starting opening door 2022 without receiving the game ball discharged from the second passage exit 2015 and entering the receiving opening 2016. It is designed to fall downward.

  Next, the game ball that has not flown into the second starting port 2004 while flowing down the second passage 2014 is discharged right above the second special winning port 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second special winning port 2005 is in the retracted state. When it is, the second special winning opening 2005b is accepted. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the projecting state, the game ball is not received in the second special winning opening 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is inclined to the lower left direction. A game ball will be discharged to the side of the first special winning opening 2005 along.

  As described above, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, it becomes possible to enter the first right starting opening 2002b and the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Are allowed to pass. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side by the distribution member 2011, it is possible to enter the second start opening 2004. In addition, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are the second big winning opening 2005b. It is designed so that it will not join up directly above. Therefore, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, it is not possible to enter the second starting opening 2004, and the distribution member 2011 allows the second passage. When the game balls are distributed to the side of the entrance 2013 (second passage 2014), it is not possible to enter the first right starting opening 2002b or pass the game ball to the gate portion 2003.

  Further, since the distribution member 2011 distributes the game balls hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 alternately, the distribution member 2011 is provided on the first passage 2012 side. The chance of entering the right starting opening 2002b and the chance of entering the second starting opening 2004 provided on the second passage 2014 side occur alternately. Although details will be described later, a hit determination based on a ball entering the second starting opening 2004 is more advantageous to a player than a hit determining based on a ball entering the first right starting opening 2002b (second In the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting port 2004, a "small hit" is performed in most cases. Therefore, a plurality of game balls can continuously enter the second starting port 2004. When the state occurs, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, which may give a disadvantage to the game manager (hall side). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center character 2500, the distribution member 2011 distributes the game balls alternately to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Every time a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500, a chance to enter the first right starting opening 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting opening 2004 are equally given. As a result, only the winning judgment that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and the game manager (hall side) is prevented from suffering a disadvantage unilaterally.

  Further, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, there is a chance to enter the first right starting opening 2002b, but the drive door 2021 must always be in the retracted state. For example, a game ball does not enter the side of the first right starting port 2002b, and there is no possibility of entering the first right starting port 2002b. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, there is a chance to enter the second starting port 2004, but if the second starting port door 2022 is in a protruding state. If not, the game ball is not guided to the side of the second starting port 2004, and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004. In other words, if the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game balls enter the first right starting opening 2002b and the second starting opening 2004. This is not always the case, and until the player can determine whether or not the game ball enters the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004, it can be noticed with anticipation.

  Further, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, so that the gate portion provided on the first passage 2012 side is provided. The chance of the game ball passing through 2003 and the chance of entering the second starting port 2004 provided on the side of the second passage 2014 are alternately generated. Here, the second starting opening 2004 makes a normal determination based on the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003, and the second starting opening door 2022 protrudes when the result of the ordinary determination is "universal hit". It is possible to enter by changing the state. That is, unless the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003, it cannot be entered into the second starting opening 2004. In this respect, when the game ball is directed toward the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004 alternately, if the game ball is directed toward only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, for example, , Even if the game ball passes only through the gate portion 2003, a hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting opening 2004 cannot be obtained, and even if the game ball faces only the second starting opening 2004, the second The starting opening 2004 cannot be entered without being able to enter the ball, and it becomes impossible to smoothly play the game in the time saving state.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center character 2500, the distribution member 2011 distributes the game balls alternately to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Each time a game ball is driven into the right side of 2500, the roles of the first passage 2012 side where the gate portion 2003 is arranged and the second passage 2014 side where the second starting port 2004 is arranged are made different. ing. That is, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011 so that the game ball is passed to the gate portion 2003 and then shaken. By distributing the game balls to the side of the second passage 2014 by the dividing member 2011, a chance to enter the second starting opening 2004 is obtained, and the game ball that is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 is second started. It is possible to efficiently enter the ball into the mouth 2004. Therefore, even when the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, they play a useful role in advancing the game. Since the game ball does not go to only one of the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004, the game can be smoothly performed in the time saving state.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, a prize ball is paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls is “1 ball”. On the other hand, in order for the second special symbol side hit determination based on the ball entering the second starting opening 2004 to be performed, the sorting member 2011 sorts the ball to the first passage 2012 side and passes through the gate portion 2003. At least "2 balls" of a game ball to be played and a game ball that is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 and enters the second starting opening 2004 are necessary. In addition, even if the game ball is distributed to the side of the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game ball does not enter the receiving port 2016, or the second starting port door 2022 is in the retracted state. In, the game ball does not enter the second starting port 2004. In this way, as the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of entering the second starting opening 2004, the number is equal to or less than "2 balls" which is at least required for the hit determination on the second special symbol side. The number of game balls held by the player is prevented from increasing even if the game balls are continuously driven to the right of the center accessory 2500.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011. However, the game ball flowing down on either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) will be discharged directly above the second special winning opening 2005b. The second special winning opening 2005b is provided in the lower right area of the center accessory 2500. In the lower right area, the second special winning opening 2005b, the general winning opening 2001 and the A big prize hole 2005 is provided.

  Here, the general winning opening 2001 is opened at the upper side, and is a game ball that has been hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (sorted to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011). It may be a game ball.) This general winning opening 2001 is arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b, and can receive the game ball released from the second special winning opening 2005b side. The general winning hole 2001 is provided with a general winning hole sensor 4020 for detecting the accepted game ball.

  Further, the first special winning opening 2005 has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, a game ball that has been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 (the first passage 2012 and the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011). It is possible to accept a game ball distributed to either side of the two paths 2013). The first special winning opening 2005 is arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b, and when the opening / closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 is in the retracted state, from the side of the second special winning opening 2005b. The released game ball can be accepted with a high probability. In other words, like the second big winning opening 2005b described later, since the game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011 can be accepted, the first big winning is possible. When the opening / closing member of the mouth 2005 is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the first special winning opening 2005 simply by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. It should be noted that the first special winning opening 2005 is provided with a first count sensor 4005a for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The above-mentioned opening / closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 changes between a projecting state in which it is projected forward by the first attacker solenoid 2109 and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. On the other hand, according to the result of the hit determination that is drawn by the detection of the entry of the game ball by the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, That is, when the result of the hit determination is "big hit", the protruding state is changed to the retracted state.

  Further, the second special winning opening 2005b has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, it is possible to receive the game ball hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The second prize hole 2005b is arranged near the confluence of the game ball flowing down the first passage 2012 and the game ball flowing down the second passage 2013, and the opening / closing member of the second prize hole 2005b is retracted. When in the state, it is possible to accept with high probability the game ball distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the distribution member 2011. That is, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the game into the second special winning opening 2005b simply by hitting a game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500. The second special winning opening 2005b is provided with a second count sensor 4005b that detects an accepted game ball.

  The above-mentioned opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b changes between a projecting state in which it is projected forward by the second attacker solenoid 2110 and a retracted state in which it is retracted rearward. On the other hand, according to the special lottery result that is selected by the second start opening sensor 4004 detecting the entry of the game ball, that is, when the special lottery result is “small hit”, from the protruding state. It is designed to change to a retracted state.

  In addition, inside the second special winning opening 2005b, a V winning device 2400 for allocating the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b to one of the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging opening 2412 is provided. There is. The V winning device 2400 has a rotating body 2410 capable of holding the first game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b with the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b in the retracted state. One gaming ball is held in the rotating body 2410, and a V winning opening 2411 that allows the gaming body to receive the gaming ball when the rotating body 2410 rotates right while the gaming body is held in the rotating body 2410. In the state in which the game balls after the second and subsequent game balls are received in the second special winning opening 2005b, the discharge port 2412 that allows the game balls to be discharged is provided.

  That is, when the first game ball is received in the second special winning opening 2005b after the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is in the retracted state, the first game ball is rotated by the rotating body 2410. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls are received, the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the rotating body 2410. Then, when the opening / closing member of the second special winning opening 2005b is returned to the projecting state, the rotating body 2410 is rotated right by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and one gaming ball held by the rotating body 2410 is the V winning opening. It will be distributed to 2411. In addition, after the rotating body 2410 is rotated to the right by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, the rotating body is rotated to the left to return to the position where the game ball received in the second special winning opening 2005b can be held. ing.

  From the above, depending on the special lottery result that is selected by the second start opening sensor 4004 detecting the entry of the game ball, that is, when the special lottery result is “small hit”, from the protruding state It becomes possible to accept the game ball in the second special winning opening 2005b while changing to the evacuation state, but during this evacuation state (during the small hitting gaming state), at least one game ball is the second big winning opening. If the player can enter the ball in 2005b, the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410. Then, the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411, and the first V winning hole sensor 4007a and the second V winning hole sensor 4007b detect the entering of the gaming ball, which results in a "big hit (winning a prize)". In the same way as when the special lottery result is "big hit", the opening / closing member of the first special winning opening 2005 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state.

  The V winning opening 2411 is provided with a first V winning opening sensor 4007a and a second V winning opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting a game ball passing therethrough. Further, the outlet 2412 is provided with an outlet sensor 4008 that detects a game ball passing through. According to this, the game ball distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by both the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. When only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411, and fraudulent acts are prevented. Further, the total of the number of game balls detected by the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b and the number of gaming balls detected by the outlet sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 4005b. It should match the number of game balls detected by, and when these do not match, it is determined that the game ball has not entered the V winning opening 2411 and fraudulent acts are prevented. is doing.

  As described above, the second special winning opening 2005b and the first special winning opening 2005 arranged on the lower left side of the second special winning opening 2005b are distributed to the side of the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. The game balls and the game balls distributed to the side of the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) are arranged in the flow path after they have joined. That is, both the game ball distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game ball distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are the first major It is possible to enter the winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b. Therefore, although the game balls are distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the distribution member 2011, the distribution by the distribution member 2011 is performed. Similar to the structure of a normal game machine (a game machine in which a game ball is thrown into the first big prize hole 2005 or the second big prize hole 2005b by hitting the game balls), the second big that is opened in the big hit game state It is possible to prevent the entry into the winning opening 2005b or the first big winning opening 2005 which is opened in the small hitting game state. In other words, by preventing the player from unilaterally suffering the disadvantage that it is difficult to enter the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2005b, in the big hit game state and the small hit game state. I try to play smoothly.

[5-2. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower ends of the outer portion, the outer portion of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projection 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the crime prevention recess 1008. , It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[5-3. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 114 and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder mounted on the rear side of the front component member 1000 and on the rear surface of which a back unit is mounted.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder (game panel 1100), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached ( 8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin).

  In addition, the panel holder is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder, the lower rear surface of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder is opened to the rear side of the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box whose upper and front sides are open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit, and are formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharge unit 1201.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. This main control unit 1300 is provided with a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are provided as members having transparency so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various actions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator 1401 including one LED for displaying a game state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result obtained by passing a game ball to the gate portion 2003. Ordinary symbol display 1402 consisting of, the normal hold indicator 1408 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holding related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and the lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002 The first special symbol display 1403 that consists of eight LEDs that display the result of the first special lottery, and the first special hold that consists of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game balls into the first starting opening 2002. From the number display 1404 and eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. The second special symbol display 1405, and the second special reservation number display 1406 consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result or the first (2) When the special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening / closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b is repeated, Mostly prepared.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that accommodates the peripheral control board 1510. There is. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-8. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. 114. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. 120 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 122 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency which constitute the main board. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals that are input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram around a sound source built-in VDP in a liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 120, a first control unit MCG that performs a control power supply (for example, + 5V or the like) generation process and a game-related control including payout of prize balls. , And a second control unit SCG that produces an effect relating to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The 2 control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. Main control MPU1310a which is a microprocessor in which various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and ROMs for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built, and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a predetermined voltage power failure or momentary power failure, It has been.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”, which updates the big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game by hardware. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset). A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (which is input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), at high speed, other values within a predetermined numerical range are sequentially extracted without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping with other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset terminal provided with no reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a first left starting opening sensor 4002a for detecting a game ball entering the first left starting opening 2002a, a first right starting opening sensor for detecting a game ball entering a first right starting opening 2002b. 4002b, a second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starting opening 2004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. 9 and that detects fraud using a magnet, A first count sensor 4005a that detects a game ball that entered the one big winning opening 2005, a second count sensor 4005b that detects a game ball that entered the second big winning opening 2005b, and a game that entered the general winning opening 2001 General winning a prize sensor 4020 which detects the sphere, gate sensor 4003 which detects the game sphere which passes gate section 2003, in the right side territory of center accessory 2500 A right area entrance sensor 4006 for detecting a game ball that has entered, a V winning hole sensor 4007a and a V winning hole sensor 4007b for detecting a game ball distributed to the V winning hole 2411 in the second big winning hole 2005b, the second large The detection signal from the discharge port sensor 4008 that detects the game balls that have been distributed to the discharge port 2412 in the winning opening 2005b (not distributed to the V winning opening 2411) is the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5. Then, it is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 4161 always drives solenoid 2107, second starting opening solenoid 2108, first attacker solenoid 2109, second attacker. By outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 2110 or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port thereof to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function is output from the panel relay board 4161. And the first special symbol display device 1403, the second special symbol display device 1405, the first special reserved number display device 1404, the second special reserved number display device 1406, the normal symbol display device 1402, the status display through the function display unit 1400. The drive signal is output to the device 1401 and the round display device 1407.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the gate sensor 4003, the right area portion entrance. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 4006, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008, whereas the general winning opening sensor 4020 is used. Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first left starting opening 2002a, the first right starting opening 2002b, the second starting opening 2004, and frequently passes through the gate section 2003 and the right area section entry sensor 4006. A game ball is frequently detected by the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entrance sensor 4006. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area entrance sensor 4006. In addition, when a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b are opened, and the game balls frequently enter, and the second big winning. Since the game balls are frequently distributed to the V winning opening 2411 and the discharging opening 2412 in the winning opening 2005b, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b. The detection of the game ball by the outlet sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the detection of the game ball by the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning opening sensor 4007a, the second V winning opening sensor 4007b, and the outlet sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game balls do not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not occur frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensor 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs an input to the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. BC0 (see FIG. 132) is provided. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this as a trigger, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[6-2. Discharge control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 121, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls and the like, and a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[6-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 121, the payout control unit 952, which performs various controls related to payout, controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and pays out the game medium executed after a predetermined time has elapsed after the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, a ROM for storing various commands, a payout control MPU 952a that is a microprocessor having a RAM for temporarily storing data, and detection from various detection switches related to payout. In order to output a drive signal to a payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, and a payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. Various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6 are exchanged. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. In the payout control MPU 952a, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the main control board 1310 and various commands regarding the payout as main pay serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. The signal is output as serial data of a serial system as a signal to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output when a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like not to be reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of a game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data system, or the operation signal (detection signal of the operation switch 954). Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the payout control without reset function 952cb as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby performing payout control without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal to be displayed on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, the player is informed that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number “2” is displayed, it means “ball ball” (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball engage in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. Number) When "3" is displayed, the fact that "payout detection sensor error" has occurred (specifically, there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, it indicates that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, it is full of game balls in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full-fill detection sensor 279). "CR is not connected" when the number "7" is displayed (the fact that the electrical connection is cut off in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (award ball stock (unpaid) is available)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid is set in advance. That the number of balls is reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photo couplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hall) through the plurality of photo couplers. ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error contents regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to operate. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer uses the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 as a main control board 1310 for advancing a game and a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending / returning display section 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 132) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[6-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, exchange of various signals between the payout controller 952 and the CR unit 6 and exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 122. As shown in FIG. 122, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 but also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (to be precise, the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls and the like is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 through the lending device connection terminal plate 869 for gaming balls and the like. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) in this embodiment) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 ..

  The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the unpaid balance display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is turned on (turned on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via a ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 switches on (turns on) the return button 329, and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

  The ball lending / returning display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven, so-called a dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting, and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The content of light emitted from the container can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball loan display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining loan display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball loan display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for the game ball, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[6-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The firing control unit 953 performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[6-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the electric power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[6-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. And the detection signal from the input terminal are input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, The game ball received by the ball sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

[6-4. Peripheral control board]
In the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control section SCG for such a first control section MCG, as shown in FIG. 123, performance control is performed based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and 19, a peripheral display control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a game board side effect display device 1600, and a door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls sound such as music and sound effects output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and calendar information and time that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies minutes and seconds, and a speaker 921. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by rotating operation of the knob portion volume such as music or sound effects that is output from the fine upper speaker 573.

[6-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various LED light emission modes) Manage the schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for, etc., and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of the jackpot gaming state and information for managing special effect flags, etc.) ) Is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is normally operating. I have it.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored contents only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I / O port via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. It is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric power of the dial drive motor 414 or the like provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. The door side motor drive data for outputting the drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Door-side light emission data for transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the LED or outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the LED serial I / O port.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, the detection signal from the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the operation button 410 provided in the effect operation unit 400 is serialized by the door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided in the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. This serialized production operation unit detection data is detected from the door-side serial transmission circuit via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit to detect the production operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Is input to the serial I / O port.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. I am diagnosing whether or not.

[6-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral control various serial I, with the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as the center. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data from / into the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read / written with various data via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

  Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control internal serial I / O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control internal WDT 1511af included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, and other input / output devices, to independently perform data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading / writing to / from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 are provided. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, and other input / output devices, without passing through the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are provided to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak Reading and writing is performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae include serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period of time, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. .. In this way, music and sound effects are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player). The notification sound and the notification sound are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound are output without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. As a result, for example, when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the speaker 921 and the output channel are assigned to the speaker 921 among a plurality of output channels to be described later. Although the effect sound such as music or sound effect output from the upper speaker 573 becomes small, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is committing an illegal act, among a plurality of output channels described later. It is possible to output the notification sound assigned to the error notification dedicated channel and set to a high volume (the maximum volume in this embodiment). That is, by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, it is possible to adjust the volume of music, sound effects, etc., which are assigned to the effect channels and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume of the notification sound assigned to the error notification dedicated channel and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 cannot be adjusted. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume for outputting the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while It is possible to increase the volume of the sound output and add music or sound effects to the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 to make it more powerful, or to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is highly likely.

[6-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are output. In this sound command data, among a plurality of output channels (32 channels of channel 1 (CH1) to channel 32 (CH32) in this embodiment) in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, Output channel number (CH1 to CH32) for instructing which output channel to assign, and which track, out of a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, is incorporated with sound data such as music and sound effects. The track number for doing this is specified. As described above, in the present embodiment, the pair of left and right upper speakers 573 are provided for stereo reproduction of music, sound effects, and the like, so that music and sound effects are output from the left upper speaker 573 to the sound generation schedule data. 2 and the output channel number assigned to output music and sound effects from the right upper speaker 573 are defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. .

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed from the date and time when the effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85% by adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information.

[6-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores, among the various information updated by execution of various control programs, those to be backed up. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy area 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b Various control data copy area 1511ce for storing the copied data for exclusive use, and backup non-management for storing for exclusive use those of various information updated by executing various control programs The target work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 146) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 127 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. "Bank" is a minimum management unit that represents the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is "Bank". The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are the same storage areas as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is respectively added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4" (effect information (1fr) and effects described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, and thus “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And "Bank4" (the effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is output. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. The door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which the received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the received various commands are stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, which is a storage area to be set, has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). A storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are also things that are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and a production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511. In ai, various information obtained by operating the operation button 410 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400 (for example, detection from various detection switches provided in the performance operation unit 400). (Operation history information of the operation button 410 created based on the signal, etc.) is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak. When the drawing data is received and it is determined that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to each other based on a LOCKN signal which will be output to notify that effect. Various information that acquires the frequency of defects and the occurrence state of defects between A storage area.

  It should be noted that the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of Bank0 (1fr) and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door-side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed last time, the processing is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Is becoming

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

  When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs each having two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is placed in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 146). Is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state (for example, for instructing the start of effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 120 is operated within a predetermined period from the time when the power is turned on. Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. Further, when the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. There is. By operating the effect selection left button 331, the effect selection right button 332, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, The history of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, etc.) can be cleared, but the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. .. Also in this respect, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is performance information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and special performance flags). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as a backup target in Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. “Bank” is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, as described above. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. Performance information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM) that is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, the backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[6-4-2. LCD display controller]
FIG. 123 shows a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. As shown, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a for performing drawing control, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, music, sound effects, and the like are added. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing various sound data, and serialized music and sound effects as audio data The audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 A door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of the display device 460 and is stored in the dish unit 320 and which transmits to the effect display drive board 4450, and a serial output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. In addition to a signal output from the differential circuit 1512e for differentially converting the LOCKN signal output request data, which is data, into a plus signal and a minus signal, and a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the differential circuit 1512e A signal is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is received. When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. The forced switching circuit 1512f, which is connected in this way, is provided. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main frame back image data used for displaying the main frame back image where the positions of the respective parts on the back of the main frame 4 are visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen Image of service mode screen used for, break used to display break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputted to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral. The schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to generate the sound source. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input with the V blank signal for the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[6-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. A VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from a channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 that is attached to the right side of the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive substrate 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, "V-by-One (" By adopting the differential communication called "registered trademark" ", the structure is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a differential interface by a serial method called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface by a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Thus, when the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a becomes Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 for one screen (1 The drawing data (for each frame) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side Image data for effect display device 460 from channel CH2 Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, the "screen data for one screen (one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

  Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Not output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In this embodiment, the frame frequency of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to about 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound effects and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effects are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and the output is assigned according to the output channel number. A channel is set, and music, sound effects, etc. output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound that is assigned to the effect channel among the plurality of output channels and is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the above-described knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated. The adjusted board volume is set as the sub-volume value, and the notification sound output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 assigned to the error notification dedicated channel of the plurality of output channels is output from the volume adjustment volume 1510a. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by moving the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 to a setting mode described later. Specifically, by operating the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode is shifted to the setting mode, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays a screen for performing the setting mode. In this setting mode, the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are operated to change the calendar information displayed on the door frame side production display device 460, reset the time information, and the game board side production display device 1600. Of the backlight brightness, volume adjustment of effect sound such as music and sound effect output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state and the like). The operation button 410 is operated in a state where the cursor is placed on any one of a plurality of items such as clear, and the item indicated by the cursor is selected. When the volume adjustment of the effect sound such as the music or the sound effect output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is selected, the effect select left button 331 is operated to decrease the volume or the effect select right button. By operating 332, the volume can be increased. Further, the volume of the effect sound such as music and sound effect output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is set in five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, and is normally set to the setting 3, but the effect selection left button 331. By operating the or effect selection right button 332, the volume can be adjusted to any one of the settings 1 to 5.

  In addition, the sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the built-in sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is Actually, the master volume value that is the volume output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to be output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound assigned to the effect channel among the plurality of output channels and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks. Sound data and the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. , The volume of the synthesized effect sound is actually amplified to a master volume value that is the volume output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. Dedicated channel for error notification among multiple output channels For the assigned notification sound output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub volume for adjusting the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume that does not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a set as a value is combined with the maximum volume, and the combined volume of the notification sound is actually output to the speaker 921 and the upper part. It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume output from the speaker 573, and the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, when the effect sound is assigned to the effect channel among the plurality of output channels and the effect sound is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1 are prevented. To briefly explain the control for outputting the notification sound by being assigned to the error notification dedicated channel of the plurality of output channels to notify the store clerk etc., first, the sub volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is forcibly muted. , The sound data of the track in which this effect sound was incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute it, the sound data of the track in which the notification sound was incorporated, and the volume of the notification sound was set to the maximum volume. The sub volume value and the volume of the effect sound and the volume of the notification sound thus synthesized are actually combined with each other by the speaker 92. And amplified to a master volume value as a volume that is output from the upper speaker 573, and outputs the amplified effect sound and alarm sound as an audio data to the audio data transmission IC1512c Serialize.

  That is, as a sound output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is actually output. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it is not output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 only for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the sound that has been forcibly set to mute up to now. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the generation schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value, which is the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a and adjusted (at this time, the operation volume of the operation unit 400). When the operation mode 410 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound) and is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. ing.

  In this way, when the effect sound is assigned to the effect channel of the plurality of output channels and the effect sound is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the pachinko machine 1 malfunctions and the misconduct to the pachinko machine 1 is prevented. When a notification sound is output by being assigned to an error notification dedicated channel among a plurality of output channels to notify the store clerk or the like, the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, since the muffled effect sound progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, when the notification sound is no longer output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 after a predetermined period of time, the effect sound is changed to the notification sound. Does not start to output again from the point where the So that the start to output again from where it proceeds in accordance with between elapsed schedule data for generating sound to the point.

[6-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b, as shown in FIG. 125, for drawing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effect, notification sound, and notification sound are also stored in advance.

[6-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as differential system serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also used as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 125, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d causes the three video signals of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, the horizontal synchronization signal, and the vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first The length of the wiring required for the second path is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is rotatably supported by the body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4 side, such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 provided on the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various substrates provided to the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged. Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5, which is a unitized unitary structure of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it is subject to noise that has entered.

  Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, " By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if the mechanism of differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd. is adopted and it is hard to be influenced by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data in parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the Shiba ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the regular one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm-like image is displayed and no image is displayed. There is a problem that it is impossible to recognize whether there is any.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the channel frame CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has a door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration. Therefore, even if the serial data of the differential system is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm from being displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is detached from the body frame 4 for maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, differential system communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Is used as a differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected to each other by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. As a result, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are respectively formed with the above-described video transmission wiring patterns separated from the power supply wiring patterns and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 cross over a plurality of relay terminal boards, so that the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal that transmits serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the wiring of the power supply and other various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one wiring is red and the other wiring is gray, and the wiring for supplying power in the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[6-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input to the plus signal and minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection of the ,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitization circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected because the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted in the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it is possible to determine that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 does not have a problem, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, “a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device” is notified. Please call the clerk. ”), And control the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source Along with outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") indicating that is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound is output from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. As a result, the notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly output from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. .. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration substrates included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[6-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 123, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds the calendar information that specifies the date and the time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is mainly configured by the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and sets them in the acquired calendar information and time information. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and the time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the brightness adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. .. The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, the time information and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa also stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, hour, minute and second stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are equipped with cold cathode tube type backlights, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON / OFF control or only ON of the backlight. It is supposed to do.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

  Thus, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state in low probability or high probability).

  Further, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. By operating the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 of the production operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side production display device 1600. To a desired brightness, adjust effect sounds such as music and sound effects output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 to a desired volume, and contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (big hit game state is You can clear the history that occurred). Specifically, by operating the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode is shifted to the setting mode, and the door frame side effect display device 460 displays a screen for performing the setting mode. In this setting mode, the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 are operated to change the calendar information displayed on the door frame side production display device 460, reset the time information, and the game board side production display device 1600. Of the backlight brightness, volume adjustment of effect sound such as music and sound effect output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (history of occurrence of jackpot gaming state and the like). The operation button 410 is operated in a state where the cursor is placed on any one of a plurality of items such as clear, and the item indicated by the cursor is selected. Then, when the brightness adjustment of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is selected, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is reduced or effected by operating the effect selection left button 331. The brightness can be increased by operating the selection right button 332. Further, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set in five stages of setting 1 to setting 5, and is normally set to setting 3. However, the effect select left button 331 and the effect select right button 332 are operated. By doing so, the brightness can be adjusted to any one of the settings 1 to 5. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. A decrease in luminance due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information and the currently set brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

  For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted on the basis of the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. Then, when December has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted on the basis of the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[6-4-4. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is assigned to the effect channel of the plurality of output channels and is used to rotate the knob to adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Can be adjusted by. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A / D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the volume portion 1510a is the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the value of 1024 steps is divided into 7 and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 to the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion, music and sound effects are output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by being assigned to the effect channel among the plurality of output channels. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, among the plurality of output channels for notifying the clerk of the hall of occurrence of malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or cheating to the pachinko machine 1, etc. Notify the notification sound output assigned to the error notification dedicated channel, the content related to the game effect, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful, or the game is played). A notification sound output by being assigned to a production channel among a plurality of output channels for outputting a high possibility of shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player is also output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. However, the notification sound and notification sound are output without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob. , So that it can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control section 1512 (source built VDP1512a) by a program the volume to maximum volume from mute.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Thus, for example, when a store clerk in the hall or the like turns the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the speaker 921 and the upper speaker are assigned to the effect channels out of the plurality of output channels. Although the effect sound such as music and sound effect output from the 573 is reduced, when the pachinko machine 1 is in trouble or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the error notification dedicated channel among the plurality of output channels The notification sound set to a large volume (in the present embodiment, the maximum volume) can be output by being assigned to. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion, the volume for outputting the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while By increasing the volume of the sound output, in addition to music and sound effects, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be rendered more powerful, or for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to an advantageous gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the volume of music and sound effects are adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the effect selection left after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. By operating the button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, it is possible to adjust the volume of the music or the effect sound that is output by being assigned to the effect channel among the plurality of output channels to a desired volume. .. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332. The adjusted sound volume incorporates sound data of effect sound such as music or effect sound that is output by being assigned to the effect channel of the plurality of output channels of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Although it is set and updated as a sub-volume value for the track and is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the effect sound, the notification sound and the plurality of notification sounds output by being assigned to the error notification dedicated channel among the plurality of output channels described above are output. Of the output channels, the volume of the notification sound assigned to the effect channel and output is not reflected in the adjustment.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the operation of the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value depending on the case. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to keep the main body frame 4 open from the outer frame 2. Then, the store clerk in the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, with the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may not hear music or sound effects, or the player may feel large and hear music or sound effects loudly. Therefore, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the volume of music or effect sound can be adjusted to a desired volume. As a result, the player can adjust the volume of the music or sound effect to a desired volume, so if the clerk in the hall feels the volume is too low to hear the music or sound effect, the production selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music or sound effect is noisy, the effect selection left button 331 or The production selection right button 332 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player, who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and was playing a game, feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time he or she sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and the game was previously seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and played. If the player feels the adjusted volume loud and feels noisy music or sound effects, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game operates the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332. Then, the volume can be reduced to a desired level.

[7. Commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 127 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. Is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127, and FIG. 129 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a game ball payout device for renting balls is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 126 (a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. , Two prize balls are designated, ..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as ball rental balls as a storage plate) are installed adjacent to a game hall (hall). 1 is electrically connected to the ball lending machine (such a pachinko machine is referred to as “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls, ... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 126 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies self-check.
By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits), and as shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, a status indicating the type of the command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[7-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 127, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 127, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is a deviant, specific jackpot, The non-specific jackpot is designated, the special figure 1 tuning effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. The gaming state is composed of a time saving state instructing that it is a time saving state and a non-time saving state (normal game state) instructing not being a time saving state. Here, in the time saving state, for example, the time for displaying the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display device 1402 in a variable display is shortened compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state), and the stop display is performed in the light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result. By doing so, the number of times stop display of the ordinary lottery result in the later-described ordinary lottery in the predetermined time is increased as compared with the non-time saving state, and further, the period during which the second starting opening door 2022 is projected is set to the non-time saving state (normal Compared with (gaming state), a state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (ball entry rate) of gaming balls to the second starting opening 2004 by making it longer (in other words Then, as compared with the non-time saving state, the number of determinations as to whether or not the second starting opening door 2022 is caused to project is increased, and when the second starting opening door 2022 is caused to project, a second start operation is performed. By lengthening the duration of the protruding operation of the mouth door 2022, a game ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)). Even when the time saving state ends and the normal game state (non-time saving state) is controlled when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state, the second starting opening 2004 is previously stored in the second starting opening 2004. When a predetermined number of game balls are not accepted, the protruding state can be maintained even after being controlled to the normal game state (non-time saving state). However, in the normal game state (non-time saving state), when a predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls are accepted or a preset opening time elapses) is satisfied, the protrusion is maintained. The state ends and the state is changed to the retracted state.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the time saving state, when the player hits the right side, the game ball is placed in the winning opening such as the first right starting opening 2002b or the second starting opening 2004. Based on the fact that the award is expected to be paid out, the expected value of winning balls is expected to be compared with the expected amount of expected balls to be obtained. It is set to be larger. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable for the player not to launch a new game ball when, for example, in the situation where the number of held jackpots for jackpot determination has reached the upper limit while being controlled to the time saving state. .

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time elapses (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[7-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization production related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 120, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 147, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. Concerning the second special symbol display 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronization effect start command (variation pattern command) is for instructing the start of special figure synchronization effect with the effect pattern (variation pattern) specified in the mode, and the special symbol 2 specification command is a deviant, specific jackpot, The non-specific big hit is designated, and the end of special figure 2 tuning effect is an instruction to end the special figure 2 tuning effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 fluctuation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 127, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit pattern display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command starts during the first to 15th round big winning opening 1 opening (first big winning opening 2005 Nth opening). The opening of the round or the opening of the round) is instructed, and the command to display the closing of the special winning opening 1 is started during the closing of the special winning opening 1 between the rounds (the closing of the first winning opening 2005 between the rounds or the start of closing). ), And the special winning opening 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls with a count of 0 to 10 has been counted (first detected by the first count sensor 4005a shown in FIG. 120, the first count sensor 4005a). The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2005) is transmitted, and the big hit ending command is an instruction to start the big hit ending. Handle display command is an indication of a big hit pattern information display.

  Further, the small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command starts during the small hit opening (during the small win, the second big winning opening 2005b is open or open). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium-large winning opening winning effect (during a small hit, the game ball that entered the second big winning opening 2005b is detected by the second count sensor 4005b). The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As for the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 15th rounds (first big winning opening The special winning opening 1 closing display command is transmitted when the Nth round of 2005 is opened), and when the special winning opening 1 is closed (closing of the first special winning opening 2005 starts), the special winning opening 1 count is displayed. The command is when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the big winning opening 1 is changed (when the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and the game ball entered in the first big winning opening 2005 is detected by the first count sensor 4005a). When it is detected, the big hit ending command is sent when the big hit ending starts, and the big hit symbol display command is when the big winning opening is opened (first It is sent to open at the time) of the winning port 2005.

  Also, the small hit opening command is sent at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit open display command is sent when the small hit is opened (when the second big winning opening 2005b is opened during the small hit) and the small hit count is counted. The display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball entering the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b), and the small hit ending command Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 127, the category of power-on is composed of a power-on state, a power-on main control return destination, and a command named special figure 1 remaining variable time designation. A status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is executed when the power is turned on (in addition to the case of turning on the power, the time of restoration of power by power failure or momentary power failure is included). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on and power-recovery when power is restored due to power failure or momentary power failure) .), Information indicating which of the above-mentioned time saving state and non-time saving state is used for recovery, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, what kind of game specification (for example, probability variation occurs) for which copyright And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is a series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type indicating the model type, and for identifying the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes in a state where the number of changes of special symbols is limited And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command indicates information indicating the driving state of the second starting opening solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120 and the driving states of the first attacker solenoid 2109 and the second attacker solenoid 2110 shown in FIG. 120. It mainly consists of information to instruct.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Also included). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when returning from a power failure or momentary power failure, a power-on state command and a power-on main command in the initialization process of step S1 in the main control side game control main process described later. A control return destination command is transmitted.

  Special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time designation command, when power interruption occurs during the chance mode that is changing the first special symbol during time saving, after power-on (after power restoration), first special symbol during time saving The variable display of the first special symbol will be restarted only for the remaining time in the variable time of 120 seconds, but when the display is restarted in the chance mode on the effect display device 1600, the remaining time is 3 It indicates which period of the classification corresponds to. Specifically, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time reduction is 0 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, which period corresponds to To instruct.

  Special Figure 1 As a timing for transmitting the command to specify the remaining fluctuation time, save time when the main control board power is turned on (including power restoration and power restoration by power failure or momentary power failure). In the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is restarted, during the time when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses during the fluctuation of the restarted first special symbol (when the normal symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol fluctuation starts, It is sent at an early timing. In other words, if the power is shut off during the fluctuation display of the normal symbol during the fluctuation of the first special symbol during time saving, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the fluctuation display of the normal symbol will be restarted. However, when the fluctuation time of the changing normal symbol has elapsed (at the time of determining the normal symbol), the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time designation command is transmitted at the same timing as the general-purpose figure synchronization effect end command. On the other hand, when the power is shut off when the normal symbol does not change during the fluctuation of the first special symbol during time saving, if the power is turned on (after the power is restored), when the fluctuation of the new ordinary symbol starts. , Special figure 1 remaining variable time designation command is transmitted at the same timing as the universal figure synchronization effect start command. The special figure 1 remaining variable time designation command is actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 120, and the division thereof is, as shown in FIG. 127, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 120. Concerning the device 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command (universal figure variation pattern command) is an instruction to start the universal figure entrainment effect with the production pattern (general figure variation pattern) specified in the mode. The big hit and non-specific big hit are designated, the universal figure synchronization effect end command is an instruction to end the ordinary figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is to instruct a game state. As described above, the gaming state is composed of a time saving state that indicates a time saving state and a non-time saving state (normal game state) that indicates not being a time saving state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol variation start, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the universal figure synchronization effect start, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol variation time elapses (when the regular symbol is fixed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol winning / losing information is designated. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related is related to the second starting opening door 2022 which is advanced and retracted by the driving of the second starting opening solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120, and its division is, as shown in FIG. It consists of a command called the opening, the opening of the public train, and the end of the map. A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure opening command is for instructing to start the universal figure opening, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (the second starting opening door 2022 is driven forward by the second starting opening solenoid 2108). In the state of protruding to the end, or when protruding, the ending command for universal figure is an instruction to start ending for universal figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted at the start of the universal figure opening, and the universal battery opening display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (the second starting door 2022 is the second starting opening solenoid 2108). When the ending command for the universal figure ends, the ending command for the universal figure is transmitted when the ending command for the universal figure starts. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the classification of the notification display is made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize abnormality display command is when a game ball enters the first prize hole 2005 or the second prize hole 2005b when the player has won the prize hole other than during the big hit (condition device is operating). When the count sensor 4005 detects that game ball), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. In the case where there is an electrical connection abnormality in, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command is, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensors 4002a and 4002b, and the second start. When the disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with the mouth sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. occurs, Is intended to instruct the start, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 120.

  The door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to notify the door opening. The door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In the case of the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main frame opening command is issued when the main frame 4 is in the open state, and the main frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when a prize is won in the special winning opening except during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start opening sensor 4002a, 4002b, the second start opening sensor 4004, It is transmitted when any of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. is in a disconnection or short circuit state, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the closed state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is open to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). It should be noted that these various commands are actually transmitted by the switch processing of step S12 in the main control side timer interrupt processing.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the status display section is composed of a frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), an error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to an error cancellation command), and a command named frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It is indicated by the specification of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 128, “7 * H” is set. The status is set as well as the received command is directly set as the mode. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7 * H” to these received commands. Is formatted into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted by the switch process of step S12 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 128, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 123). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected).

  As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when a power failure or momentary power failure is restored, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, a main control side game control main, which will be described later, is described. A test command is transmitted in the initialization process of step S1 in the process.

[7-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 128, the starting mouth winning, the variation shortening operation end designation, the special symbol 1 memory, the special symbol 2 memory, the special symbol type prefetch, the variable pattern prefetch, the gate passage, the normal symbol memory, the ordinary symbol It is composed of commands with the names of symbol type prefetch and general pattern variation pattern prefetch. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The starting mouth winning command is for instructing to start the starting mouth winning effect, and when the game ball enters the first starting mouths 2002a and 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting mouth sensors 4002a and 4002b. The start of the effect and the start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 are respectively instructed, and the fluctuation reduction operation end designation is made. The command is for instructing a state transition from the fluctuation shortening operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbols 1 reserved (the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b a game ball. Also enters the ball and tells the number of balls (reserved number) not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400. That is, the special symbol 2 storage command is a special symbol 2 hold 0 to 4 (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400). The number of balls that have not been used yet (the number of reserves) is to be transmitted, and the special symbol type prefetch command is a special symbol 1 hold in the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Before being used, the result of display by the first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold prior to use (departing symbol, big hit symbol) and the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Displayed by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the pre-reading and holding of the special symbol 2 before being used for the variable display of the special symbol in the device 1405 (small hit symbol, large And), and the variation pattern prefetch command is a prefetch before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. And before the variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 1 hold, before the special symbol 2 hold is used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400. , And the variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol based on the pre-reading and the special symbol 2 hold, respectively. In addition, the gate passage command is for instructing the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol reserves (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 to display the function). Normal symbol display 1402 of 1400 is to convey the number of balls that are not yet used for variable display of normal symbols (holding number)), and the normal symbol type look-ahead command is the normal symbol of the normal symbol hold function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the normal symbol on the display device 1402, the display result by the normal symbol display device 1402 based on the read-ahead of the normal symbol is specified (outlier symbol, symbol per ordinary symbol) is designated. The figure variation pattern look-ahead command, the normal symbol hold is used for the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. A, it is used to specify the read-ahead to widely view the variation pattern to be used in variable display of normal symbol based upon the normal symbol reserved. Further, the right area part entry sensor passage command is an instruction (notification) of passage of the game ball to the right area part entry sensor 4006.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is the starting mouth winning command (when the game ball enters the first starting mouths 2002a and 2002b based on the detection signals from the first starting mouth sensors 4002a and 4002b). Or when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004), mainly from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change reduction operation end designating command is transmitted by voice to notify that effect, and is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is fixed (after the elapse stop period has elapsed) after the specified number of changes have been reduced, and the special symbol 1 The memory command is the special symbol 1 when the operation reserve ball number changes (when the game ball enters the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b and the reserve number increases, or from the reserve number, the first feature It is transmitted when the number of holdings is reduced by using the variable display of the special symbol on the symbol display 1403), and the special symbol 2 memory command is a special symbol 2 operation holding ball number change (game in the second starting port 2004). When the ball enters and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases when the number of holdings decreases by using the second special symbol display device 1405 for variable display of special symbols from the number of holdings), the special symbol type The prefetch command is transmitted when the special symbols 1 and 2 operation holding balls increase (when the game balls enter the first starting ports 2002a and 2002b and the second starting port 2004 and the holding number increases), and the variation pattern The prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the gate passage command is transmitted when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is when the number of normal symbol operation holding balls changes (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the hold number increases. When, or when the number of holdings is reduced by using the normal symbol display 1402 to display the variation of the normal symbol from the number of holdings), the normal symbol type look-ahead command is a normal symbol operation holding ball number increase ( When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of holdings increases), the general pattern variation pattern prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol type prefetch command is transmitted, and the right area part entry sensor passage command is It is transmitted when the game ball passes through the right area entrance sensor 4006. Incidentally, these various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process of step S17 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensors 4002a, 4002b, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004), the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are mainly transmitted by voice to notify that fact. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

  The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball spill, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ghost, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and the payout detection sensor is set. On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 127 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for the ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball removal. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value 0, B2 has a value 0, B3 has a value 0, B4 has a value 0, B5 has a value 1, B6 has a value 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted at the time of power restoration, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes.

[8. Game contents]
Next, the game content of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 130 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side (left hit) or the right side (right hit) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the downflow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the first left starting opening 2002a is located immediately below, so that it is received at the first left starting opening 2002a with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first left starting opening 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the first left starting opening 2002a. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first left starting opening 2002a.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, there is a possibility that the game ball is moved toward the center in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and is received by the first left starting opening 2002a. ..

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (the so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the region (specific region) where the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003, and the like are provided flows down. Further, a distribution member 2011 that distributes the game balls to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 alternately is provided on the upstream side of the specific region, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. Is allowed to be received in the first right starting opening 2002b and passing through the gate portion 2003, and the game ball distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distributing member 2011 can be received in the second starting opening 2004. It is supposed to be.

  When the game ball hit to the right in this way passes through the gate unit 2003, the main control board 1310 normally determines. In this normal judgment, if the winning symbol is won per normal figure, and the corresponding selection is shown in the normal symbol fluctuation, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is moved forward and projected to the player side (projection). State), the game ball that has passed through the receiving port 2016 is received by the second starting port door 2022 and can be received by the second starting port 2004. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment, when winning the universal figure, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is retracted after the ordinary symbol stops in the mode of the universal symbol. Then, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 enters the game board 5 (retracted state). However, even if the predetermined time has not elapsed after operating the second starting opening door 2022 to the protruding state, the predetermined upper limit number (1 ball in this example) of game balls Is received in the second starting port 2004, at that time, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is moved backward to operate in the retracted state, so that the game ball cannot be received in the second starting port 2004. Become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the game ball is received in the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) or the second starting opening 2004, the main In the control board 1310, a hit determination (first special game state) in which an advantageous game state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit game state", "small hit game state", "time saving state", etc.) is generated The symbol side, or the second special symbol side) is performed. If you win the big hit in the hit determination, determine the big hit type based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball, A gaming privilege (a big-hit gaming state or a gaming state after the big-hit gaming state) corresponding to the determined big-hit type (determined big-hit type) is given. Similarly, if you win the small hit in the hit determination, the small hit type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter, also referred to as the symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball However, a gaming privilege (small hitting gaming state or a big hitting gaming state, which is executed when V prize is won in the small hitting gaming state, after the big hitting gaming state, corresponding to the small hit (determined small hitting type) of the determined type Gaming state).

  When the hit determination is carried out, after the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is variably displayed for the variation time selected based on the result of the corresponding determination, the symbol aspect according to the result ( By stopping the special symbol with the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, and the lost symbol, the player can recognize the special symbol. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination will be satisfied, and the main control board 1310 will be satisfied. In the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) that are held in an unexecuted state, the hit judgment with the highest digestion order will be digested (executed).

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, a big hit game state in which a player can obtain a prize is performed on the main control board 1310. . In executing the big hit game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the big hit game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the number of prescribed rounds that are predetermined according to the determined jackpot type (in this embodiment, 10 or 15 rounds when the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the second A round game is performed in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened (the first special winning opening 2005 is set in a state in which a game ball can be received) with an upper limit of 15 rounds when the special design is a big hit design. One round game is until the first big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and the first big winning opening 2005 has a specified number ( Upper limit number of prizes: 9 game balls in this example) until the game ball is won, or until the specified time (round game time: 28.5 seconds in this example) elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. Then, when the round game of the specified number of rounds is finished, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state is performed is generated, and when the ending period ends, the big hit game state ends. To be done.

  If the stopped special symbol (the second special symbol in this example) is a small hit symbol, a small hit game state in which the player can win the prize is performed on the main control board 1310. In executing the small hitting game state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hitting game state is performed is generated. Then, when this opening period ends, the second special winning opening 2005b is opened (the second special winning opening 2005b is set in a state in which a game ball can be received). In the form, it is performed once). During a single open game, until a specified number (upper limit number of prizes: 9 balls in this example) of game balls are awarded to the second big winning opening 2005b, or a specified time (open game time: 28 in this example). It will be released until 0.5 seconds). In the opening game, the opening effect is performed. Then, when the opening game of the specified number of times of opening is completed, an ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hitting game state is performed is generated, and when the ending period is ended, the small hitting game state is generated. Is ended.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, after the end of the small hitting game state, the large hitting game state may be continuously generated. Specifically, in the small hitting game state, the game ball is won in the second big winning hole 2005b, and the winning game ball is distributed to the internal V winning hole 2411 (V winning). The number of prescribed rounds that are determined in advance according to the type of small hit (in the present embodiment, 10 rounds if the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, 15 if the second special symbol is a big hit symbol) A round game is played in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened with (round) as the upper limit. Therefore, in the ending effect at the end of the small hitting game state, not only the end of the small hitting game state is shown, but also a game ball enters the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. It is also indicated whether or not, that is, whether or not the big hit game state is continued from the small hit game state. In addition, when the big hit game state is continuously generated after the end of the small hit game state, the small hit game state in which the second special winning opening 2005b is opened is one round, and a number including this one round Until the number of round games reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), the round game in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened is played.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, except for a part of the case where the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, after the big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to a time saving state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state executed based on the case where the second special symbol is the big hit symbol and the second special symbol is the small hit symbol. When the game is distributed to, the game is controlled to be in a time saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over. In this time saving state, compared with a non-time saving state in which the time saving state does not occur (normal game state or the like), the result of the ordinary determination as to whether or not it is easy to put the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is derived. Usually the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation is shortened. In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal drawing is won in the normal determination, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward (forward and backward operations) in a forward / backward pattern different from that in the non-time saving state. Is becoming

  In the present embodiment, in the case of winning the universal figure in the non-time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward in a short forward and backward manner (0.2 seconds in this example). On the other hand, in the case where A is performed, in the case of winning the universal figure in the time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward / backward in a long forward / backward manner (6 seconds in this example). Is done. In other words, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is longer in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state, and the total protruding time corresponding to one ordinary drawing is long, so that the player operates advantageously. Is set. Therefore, in the time saving state, compared with the case of the non-time saving state, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is in a state where the ball entry rate is improved so that the second starting opening door 2022 is more likely to move to the projecting state, and the right hit is continuously performed. When the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 when it is, the normal symbol variation according to the normal determination is easily performed. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, at least one game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2004 if the player continues to right-handed when he / she wins the game in the time saving state. Even if the player hits right in the drawing and continues to right-handed, the game ball is rarely received in the second starting opening 2004.

  Further, the time saving state according to this embodiment is to be finished when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the jackpot gaming state is finished. . Similarly, when the game ball is a small winning symbol on the second special symbol side (small winning symbol A, small hit symbol B, small hit symbol C), and the V winning symbol 2411 inside the second special winning symbol 2005b. , When the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the jackpot gaming state has ended, it ends.

  The specifications of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment are as follows. Eight kinds of numbers, [1] to [8], are adopted as the decorative design, and [222], [333], [444], [555], [666], [777], [888], and a small hit as the big hit design. [111] is adopted as the design. Further, the winning probability of the big hit on the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side is defined as 1/300. The winning probability of the small hit on the first special symbol side is 0/300, and the winning probability of the small hit on the second special symbol side is 299/300, respectively. As a winning probability per ordinary figure, 1/20 is specified. Further, as the number of game balls, three are for the first left starting opening 2002a, the first right starting opening 2002b, and the second starting opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning. Fifteen are defined for each mouth 2005b. Further, as the advancing / retreating pattern A in which the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward / backward in a short advancing / retreating manner, the second starting opening door 2022 operates once in the protruding state and operates in the protruding state. It is defined that the protruding state is maintained until 20 ms elapses from. In addition, as the advancing / retreating pattern B in which the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward / backward in a long advancing / retreating manner, the second starting opening door 2022 operates once in the projecting state and operates in the projecting state. A mode in which the protruding state is maintained until 6 s from is specified. Further, "1 ball" is defined as the upper limit number of winnings, which is a condition for retreating the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004. In addition, in each round game of the big hit game state, "1 time" is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and "9 balls" is set as the maximum winning number. Further, in the small hitting game state, "1 time" is defined as the number of times the second big winning opening 2005b is opened, and "9 balls" is defined as the maximum winning number.

  In this way, in the non-time saving state, winning of the game ball into the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs, and the game ball is accepted into the first starting port (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b). Based on, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The game executed in this non-time saving state is a normal game, and is hereinafter referred to as a normal mode.

  In the normal mode (non-time saving state), when the game ball is received in the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), the main control board 1310 makes a hit determination, and a big hit is made in the hit determination. If you have won the big hit, after judging the big hit type whether to control in the time saving state after the game state, the first special symbol is variably displayed and the pattern mode (big hit symbol, loss) (1) stop the first special symbol. At this time, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, a big hit game state is performed.

  If the big hit type is not to be controlled after the big hit game state, the normal mode (non-time saving state) is continued again after the big hit game state. On the other hand, when the type of big hit is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state, it is controlled to the time saving state after the big hit game state.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a special symbol based on the acceptance of the game ball into the first left starting opening 2002a (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) and the second starting opening 2004 (the first One special symbol, the second special symbol) from the start of the variable display until these symbols are stopped, the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and When the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be started, and thus the special symbol started earlier (first special symbol, Until the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the start of variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) to be reserved is the first left starting opening 2002a (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) and the second. With respect to the starting ports 2004, the upper limit is four, and for more than that, the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and the second starting port 2004 are game balls. Even if it is accepted, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not suspended, and is abandoned. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to perform variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then a combination of LEDs that are turned on. By the result of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (symbol mode according to the result of the hit determination) is suggested.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the result of the hit determination as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the result of the hit determination in the effect display device 1600 is a state in which three or more symbol rows each consisting of a symbol are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and each symbol row is changed, and the symbols are variably displayed. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the symbols in the three symbol columns that are stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed so that the symbols corresponding to the hit determination results are combined. If the result of the hit determination is other than “miss”, after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image indicating the result of the hit determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a big hit game state or a small hit game state) occurs according to the result of the hit determination.

  In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the result of the hit determination by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 of the effect operation unit 400 is selected according to the result of the lottery hit determination. The operation buttons 410, the door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of the center accessory 2500, various ornaments of the back unit, the back lower rear movable effect unit, the back upper left movable effect unit, the back left movable effect unit, the back upper. It is possible to perform light emission production, movable production, display production, etc. by appropriately using the middle movable production unit, the back under front movable production unit, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions. It is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even when there is a first reserved memory number that is the number of hit judgment memories on the side of the first special symbol that is held in an unexecuted state, it is still in an unexecuted state. If there is a second reserved memory number that is the number of memories for hit determination on the side of the second special symbol that is being held, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. It has become. And, during the big hit game state, because it is not controlled to the time saving state (is controlled to the non-time saving state), the result of the determination (normal determination) whether or not it is a universal figure hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 As a universal symbol per symbol is displayed as a stop, and even if the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward, the forward and backward movement mode is a short forward and backward movement mode in which the game ball is hardly received in the second starting opening 2004. The winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In most cases, after the big hit game state, first the first special symbol. Will be variably displayed.

  Further, in this example, as the variation time of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the variation is displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. . In addition, in the time saving state, the state in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variable time is a state in which the right to become a big hit of the second special symbol (winning right) can be acquired, so in the following, this state is the chance mode. Say. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in a long variability time, a game aiming at passage of a game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is determined whether or not it is a normal figure (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on this determination result. And, when the stop mode of the normal design is the universal design design, the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to the protruding state and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening. When the game ball is received in 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, if a small hit occurs as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even one game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of the balls is always assigned to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled to be received in the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, in the case of a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases, so it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. It can be said that they have acquired the right to become a big hit (winning right). That is, the state in which the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 and the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired.

  Then, after starting the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is stopped in a symbol mode (big hit symbol, lost symbol) according to the result of the hit determination when a long variation time has elapsed. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped at the big hit symbol, the big hit game state is performed, and if there is a second reserved memory number after the big hit game state, the winning right exercising time to be described later is entered, and after the big hit game state. If there is not two reserve memory number, if the result of the hit judgment on the side of the first special symbol when starting the big hit game state is to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state, continue the chance mode and the first special symbol If the result of the hit judgment on the first special symbol side when starting the big hit game state when there is no second pending storage number is to control to the short time state after the big hit game state Exit the chance mode and shift to the normal mode. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is stopped due to a loss symbol when the long variable time has elapsed since the variable display of the first special symbol was started, if there is a second reserved memory number, it shifts to the winning exercise time, If there is no second reserved memory number, the chance mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode.

  In this way, the winning right exercising time is transferred when there is the second reserved memory number, and the game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed is performed. In addition to the fact that one of the big hits and the small hits is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side as described above, the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is small. When it is a win, it is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is acquired. Therefore, at the winning right exercising time, the jackpot gaming state is executed by the number of second reserved memories.

  Specifically, when the time for exercising the winning right is reached, first, the second special symbol is variably displayed. Then, if the symbol aspect at the time of stopping the second special symbol is a big hit symbol, the big winning game state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened according to the determined big hit type is executed, and the second special symbol is stopped. If the symbol mode at the time is a small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b into a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b is a V winning. The big hit game state in which the first special winning opening 2005 is opened is executed on the condition that the prize is distributed to the opening 2411.

  In this example, by continuing right-handing during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled so that at least one game ball can be received in the second big winning opening 2005b. When the small hit game state is ended without the ball being distributed to the V winning opening 2411, or the big hit game state executed based on the fact that the symbol aspect when the second special symbol is stopped becomes the big hit symbol is finished. In the case, if the big hit game state executed based on the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state is finished, the winning right is provided on condition that there is a second reserved memory number. Continue exercise time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the second special symbol is a big hit symbol, or the second special symbol is a small hit symbol. When the game is distributed to the mouth 2411, it is always controlled to be in a time saving state after the jackpot gaming state is over. Therefore, when the small hitting game state is ended without the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state, or the pattern mode at the time of stopping the second special symbol becomes the big hitting symbol. When the executed big hit game state ends, and when the big hit game state executed based on the game balls being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state ends If there is not, the time saving state occurs again and the mode is shifted to the chance mode.

  In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the game is started in the normal mode, the jackpot is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the jackpot gaming state, which is a more advantageous state than the ordinary mode. If the regular judgment is won in the chance mode, it becomes advantageous for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode, and if the normal judgment is not won in the chance mode, the chance mode is changed to the normal mode. To fall into a disadvantageous state for the player.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 131A is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the main control board 1310 according to the present embodiment first includes various registers and main control as a process of step S1 provided that the operation switch 954 is operated. Initializes the data stored in RAM. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. Further, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 in accordance with an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. When it is determined that the data is stored, the initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize the data stored in the various registers and the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a backup process is executed to save information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the restoration process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Also, when the initialization process is executed, the game state is controlled to the non-time saving state.

  Next, as the process of step S2, a random number, which is the number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range, is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, a special random number (first special random number, second special random number) provided for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol The variation random number used in the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of No., the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol. Reach random number used for lottery process of whether or not, the symbol random number (first symbol random number, the first symbol random number, which is used for lottery process to determine the type of big hit when it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number Random number that holds random numbers such as (two design random numbers), random numbers used in the lottery process for winning or losing the second trigger opening door 2022 (ordinary random number), and the like. It is equipped with a motor.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, when the first winning opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) is won. Also, even if the winning prize is entered into the second starting opening 2004, the reach random number is configured to be obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number. May be made to have different reach proportion execution rates by being obtained from different counters, and a first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as a reach determination table to be compared with the obtained reach random number, and a second Corresponding to the special symbol, by providing a second reach determination table in which a determination value different from the first reach determination table is set It may be so.

  In the processing of this step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random number (fluctuating random number) among these random numbers that is not related to winning or losing is updated. After the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, basically only the process of step S2 is repeatedly performed. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 mS.

  FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart showing the processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in this interrupt control, first, a register save process is performed as the process of step S11. Next, as the process of step S12, the gate sensor 4003, the first left starting port sensor 4002a, the first right starting port sensor 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count. Detection signals from various sensors such as the sensor 4005b and the above-described general winning a prize sensor 4020 are input. Then, as a process of step S13, a random number updating process for updating the value of the random number counter for generating the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbol and the ordinary symbol (special random number, ordinary random number) is updated, and the counter of the random number counter is updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a process of step S14, a special symbol process process including a lottery process according to a display mode when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped. To execute. In addition, although this special symbol process process will be described later, here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, the second special symbol process flag, which indicates the progress status of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM) Corresponding processing will be selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Then, next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes, as the process of step S15, a normal symbol process process including a lottery process for winning or losing when the second starting door 2022 operates. Even in this normal symbol process process, basically, the corresponding process is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  Further, when the special symbol process process (step S14) and the normal symbol process process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process process as the process of step S16. Then, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Then, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting the command set in the predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like in the normal symbol process process is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next performs an information output process for outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hole management computer as the process of step S18.

  Then, next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the processing of step S19, that is, the first left starting opening sensor 4002a, the first right starting opening sensor 4002b, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the first starting opening sensor 4002b. When the detection signals of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the general winning opening sensor 4020, etc. are in the ON state, the payout control board 951 is controlled to pay out the prize balls according to these signals to the player. Executes prize ball processing that outputs a command. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out the prize balls to the player. In this example, when the game ball is won in the first left starting port 2002a and the first left starting port sensor 4002a is turned on, and when the game ball is won in the first right starting port 2002b, the first When the right starting opening sensor 4002b is turned on, "3 balls", when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening sensor 4004 is turned on, "1 ball", the above When the game ball wins the first prize hole 2005 and the first count sensor 4005a is turned on, "14 balls", the game ball wins the second prize hole 2005b and the second count sensor 4005b is turned on. Then, "14 balls" are awarded to the general winning opening 2001, and when the general winning sensor 4020 is turned on, "10 balls" are awarded to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 next executes a storage process of checking the increase / decrease in the number of pending storages as the process of step S20. Next, as the process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for allowing the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. Then, after that, the drive control of the actuator that always operates is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24), this control is terminated. Becomes

  According to the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the interrupt process by the timer, but in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special symbol process process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes are updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 firstly detects the first starting port sensor (first The detection signals from the one left starting opening sensor 4002a and the first right starting opening sensor 4002b are in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b)). Under the condition (step S31), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM with built-in main control. Is executed (step S32). In addition, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the above random number. A second starting opening passage process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S35), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state. The big hit control process (step S40) for performing the above control is executed. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the jackpot type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "10R jackpot". , After opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005. The process of controlling the opening / closing pattern to be repeated 10 times to control the 10R big hit game state is executed, and the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the big hit type) about the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is " When it becomes a mode that suggests "15R jackpot", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or at the first big winning opening 2005, a game ball is 9 It was winning executes a process of controlling the 15R jackpot gaming state repeating 15 times the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first counting sensor 4005a.

  Further, in the big hit control process, after performing such opening control of the first big winning opening 2005, the process of setting the time saving flag is executed. The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control (control executed in the time saving state) is being executed, and is set when the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot that is time saving controlled after the jackpot gaming state is finished, and will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 143 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 146 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is set to one time as the number of hours saved, and after the end of the big hit game state, the hour saving control is started and the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once. When this is done, the time saving control is ended.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being controlled is set (step S36). If the hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "small win", the second special winning opening 2005b is opened for a predetermined period ( After opening (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that one game ball has been won in the second special winning opening 2005b, the processing is closed. In addition, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 2005b enters the V winning opening 2411, the big winning game state is controlled and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, when the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated 14 times to control the shift to the 15R big hit gaming state.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a, if neither the big hit execution flag or the small hit execution flag is set, the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area. On condition that the value of is "0" (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S38), On condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second special random number stored in the two special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39). In this way, in this example, when the value of the second special hold number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, the first left starting opening sensor 4002a is in the ON state, and the game ball has entered the first left starting opening 2002a, or the first right starting opening sensor 4002b. If it is determined that the game ball has entered the first right starting opening 2002b, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the step S41 As the process, first, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first number of reserved storages is "4" which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the processing of this step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is not the maximum value, the following step S43- The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S44, each random number acquired in step S41 is a first special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number obtained in step S41. Whether or not to be a big hit, if it is a big hit type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the production pre-determination processing for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variation display according to the start winning (step S45), the processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S42, when it is determined that the first number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S45, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first starting opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), the first in the storage processing (step S20). A command for instructing the number of one reserved memory (first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random numbers acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the kind of big hit, if it is not a big hit, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or is executed. The mode type of the game effect to be specified is specified (step S61).

  Then, the specified pre-determination information (whether or not it is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, whether the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of the game effect to be executed), the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories (the value of the reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the predetermination command. For example, in the production pre-determination process for the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first starting opening passage process, the specified pre-determination information, the first special random number is acquired, and the first reserved storage number (second The value of the one special reserved number counter), and the first special symbol preliminary determination command corresponding thereto is set (step S62).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), the main control board 1310 sends the pre-determination command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the start winning opening (first left starting opening 2002a, first) Either one of the right starting opening 2002b), in addition to the number of pending memories stored corresponding to the starting opening, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning is a big hit, and a big hit. If it becomes a big hit type, if it does not become a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed on the effect display device 1600, or the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed is given to the start winning. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the corresponding variable display.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary judgment command from the main control board 1310, it stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing advance determination information regarding variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. When the pre-determination command is received when the pre-determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the pre-determination information notified to the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area Stored in advance, when the first variation pattern command for notifying the variation display start of the first special symbol is received, the first variation pattern command is stored in advance in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area. Discard the determination information and move the pre-determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) storage area (in the reserved storage area). Shift the stored pre-determination information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the variable display start is specified, and the order is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

  In this way, at the time when the variable display control is put on hold, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (holding state), the jackpot expectation (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained. ), This can be preceded, for example, at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion is made possible. .

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S34).

  Now, in the process of step S33, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. 135. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the second reserved memory number is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is "4" (step S52). In the processing of this step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storage is not the maximum value, the following step S53-, in order to newly hold the variable display control of the second special symbol. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S54, each random number acquired in step S51 is a second special symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second number of reserved storages is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S53 to S54, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, a command for instructing the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation) in the storage process (step S20). Commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved storage number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol process process (step S38). The first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process are the same program module, and the random numbers used for the determination. Since the tables are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. In addition, as a result of comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination process (step S105) described later, there is no case where it is determined to be a small hit, therefore, the hit determination process executed in the first special symbol process process, The hit determination process executed in the two special symbol process processes may be a separate process, and in each process process in the first special symbol process process, the process related to the small hit may be controlled not to be executed.

1. The first special random symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the first special symbol such as the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number. Normal processing (step S80)
2. Based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the determination process of the mode when the fluctuation control of the first special symbol is stopped, etc. The first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) )
3. Regarding the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 based on the variable random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which lottery process and the like is performed (step S82)
4. First special symbol variation process to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83)
5. As the mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop process to stop the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131) to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S80) should be performed.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state based on the counter value by the first special suspended number counter. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the suspended state, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, and the variation random number) is the same main control built-in RAM Read from. Then, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), a first starting opening (first left starting opening) The random numbers extracted in accordance with the occurrence of the start winning in 2002a and the first right starting opening 2002b) are sequentially stored from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest hold (the hold that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start winning prize for the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. When a random number is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) -th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become.

  Then, after that, as the process of step S105, a hit determination process, which is a lottery process for the winning of the big hit or the small hit, is performed based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), this process ends.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 is a hit determination table and a special random number shown in FIG. 139 (A) (first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or second special symbol normal process). It is compared with the read second special random number) (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the hit determination table is stored in the ROM with built-in main control and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). Then, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one kind of the first special random number coincides with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and the 299 kinds of the first special random numbers are the above. The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the loss determination value indicating the loss (big hit probability; 1/300). Further, in this example, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process process, in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, one kind of second special random number is The second special random number so that it matches the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and that the 299 second special random numbers different from the big hit judgment value match the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit is won. Are associated with each other (big hit probability: 1/300, small hit probability: 299/300). That is, the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number is not determined to be a small hit, but is determined to be one of the big hit and the loss. In the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison, it is always determined that one of the big hit and the small hit.

  The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal processing) As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is ended.

  The result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and the special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined to be a small hit (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the variation is a small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is ended.

  On the other hand, when neither the big hit nor the small hit is won, that is, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and a reach determination table at the time saving state used when the game state is at the time saving state, and a non-time saving used when the game state is at the non-time saving state And a reach determination table in the state. Then, in the reach determination table in the time saving state, the reach determination values are such that one type of reach random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach and 71 types of reach random number match the reach determination value indicating not to reach. Random numbers are associated with each.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the non-time saving state, five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number as the reach random number set in the reach determination table in the time saving state match the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number reaches, The above reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers coincide with the reach determination values indicating that the reach random numbers are not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is reached is higher in the non-time saving state than in the time saving state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of comparison between the selected reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119), when it is determined that reach loss occurs (step S120), the variation is changed. The reach flag indicating that the reach is reached is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S131).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a selects the big hit symbol determination table shown in FIG. 139 (B), and the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected big hit symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with each symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (10R jackpot A, 10R jackpot B, 15R jackpot). It is remembered in the shape of The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. In the jackpot symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. is doing.

In particular,
1. After opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine gaming balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times, the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to the 10R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the 10R big hit A is controlled.
2. After opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine gaming balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005, it is closed. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times, the game ball can enter the first big winning opening 2005 (easy) to control the 10R big hit game state, and after the big hit game state is finished, the 10R big hit B is controlled.
3. After opening the first special winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the first count sensor 4005a that nine gaming balls have entered the first special winning opening 2005, it is closed. 15R big hit to control the game ball to the 15R big hit game state where the game ball can enter (easy) the first big winning opening 2005 by repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times, and to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state ends

  In the jackpot symbol determination table that is compared with the first symbol random number, 80 judgment values are distributed when the 10R jackpot A is obtained, and 20 judgment values are distributed when the 10R jackpot B is obtained. That is, when a lottery result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is an 80% probability of 10R jackpot A and a 20% probability of 10R jackpot B. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, all 100 judgment values are distributed when the 15R jackpot is obtained, and a lottery result to be a jackpot is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number. There will always be a 15R big hit.

  Further, when the lottery result for the big hit is obtained, the game state after the big hit game state is finished is determined according to the kind of the big hit. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), after controlling the big hit game state, a time saving flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the “10R big hit A” big hit has been obtained, after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed, the symbol shortening of the special symbol is executed once until the symbol fluctuation is executed once. When it is determined that the "10R jackpot B" jackpot is obtained, the jackpot game state for 10 rounds is executed, and then the non-time saving state is controlled, and the "15R jackpot" jackpot is obtained. When it is determined that the jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds is executed, it is controlled to a time saving state until the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed once.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, if 10R big hit A is decided, it is decided as 10R big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and if 10R big hit B is decided, it is decided as 10R big hit B symbol as a big hit symbol. .. Moreover, when it is determined that the 15R big hit in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 144 described later, it is determined as the 15R big hit symbol as the big hit symbol.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines a lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S137, selects the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, reach lose, or lose). The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, as the process of step S138, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern). Stop display in the order of the symbols (It is possible that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are displayed in sync with the same symbol in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). Specifically, the peripheral control MPU1511a, when the decoration pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is a variation stop mode (stop pattern), when 10R big hit A among the big hits is specified from the received determination result notification command. Is determined to be a 10R jackpot A pattern (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols being the same symbols except [1] among [1] to [8] symbols), and when the 10R jackpot B is specified Is determined to be a 10R jackpot B design (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs being the same design except [1] among the designs of [0] to [8]), and when the 15R jackpot is specified 15R jackpot design (a combination of the left, middle, and right decorative designs being the same design except [1] among the designs [0] to [8]) is determined. In addition, when the small hit is specified, the small hit design (the combination in which the left, middle and right decorative designs are all [1]; [111]) is determined, and when the reach loss is specified, the reach is accompanied. Loss design (the left and right decorative designs are the same design combination of [0] to [8] and the middle decoration design is different; reach reach design) is determined, and if the loss is specified, Lost design without a reach (a combination of left, middle, and right decorative designs in which at least the left and right decorative designs are different) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command elapses (game production At the end of), the determined stop design is displayed and controlled on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag as shown in FIG. 141. If it is done (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit decided at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and when neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, the normal loss (reach effect). If the result is a loss that is not executed, the variation pattern table (Fig. Not) to select (step S147).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started around. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150). Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the production control is performed on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example is provided in plural types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and design random numbers (first design random number, second design random number). Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The variable random numbers are stored in association with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, the variation pattern table selected from among a plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number, and the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process By comparing, by acquiring the variation time information associated with the read variable random number from this table, the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is determined. Thereby, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach effect to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with the variable random number. .. For example, of the 241 types of variable random numbers, 164 types of variable random numbers are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that one of the normal reach effects is to be executed, and 59 types of variable random numbers have a low jackpot expectation. It is set as a judgment value (164 to 222) indicating that one of the effects is executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are judgment values (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects having a high jackpot expectation is executed. ) Is set as. Note that the super-reach effect has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit game state, the expectation of the player for the big-hit game state when the super-reach effect is executed is higher. It is getting higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the variation pattern table of this example, 10 seconds to 90 seconds are set as the variation time corresponding to the first special random number in the non-time saving state, and 120 seconds are set in the time saving state. , 2 seconds is commonly set for the non-time saving state and the time saving state as the variation time corresponding to the second special random number.

  Then, when the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), this process ends.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S171. As the process, the change timer for which the change time is set according to the change pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the change pattern is decremented by 1. When it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, that is, the fluctuation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process ends.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S181 As the process of, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time saving flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time saving flag (step S185). Thereby, when the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once, the time saving control is ended and the control in the non-time saving state is started.

  Further, when the jackpot flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot game state is started (step S187), and jackpot game. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the big hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, a process of setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of big hit to a big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit count counter is decremented by 1 each time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit count counter reaches "0", it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the specified number of rounds. And control to end the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, the special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the special winning opening opening process (step S92) are repeatedly executed until the big hit counter reaches "0", and the big winning is opened. When the round is ended in the mouth opening process (step S92), the jackpot number counter is decremented by 1 and becomes "0". Then, the process shifts to the big winning mouth opening post-process (step S93) to set the jackpot gaming state. Execute control to end.

  Then, the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a jackpot start command (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot B start command, 15R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (10R jackpot A start command, 10R jackpot A start command) is set. Thereby, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like produce an effect of the big hit game state according to the kind of the big hit instructed by the big hit start command.

  In addition, the big hit execution flag which indicates that the big hit game state is being executed, when the big hit game state is ended, specifically, in the big winning opening open process (step S93) of the big hit control process (step S40). Opening / closing control of the first big winning opening 2005 according to the type of big hit (for example, if it is "15R big hit", after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big winning opening 2005 At the end of the open / close control that repeats the open / close pattern that is closed 15 times when the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game state) Will be reset. While the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

  If the big hit flag is not set, that is, if there is a loss, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

  When the processes of steps S186 to S189 are executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value. Then (step S194), this processing ends.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  As described above, the second special symbol process process is a program module that is substantially the same as the first special symbol process process, and the random numbers and tables used for the determination are different except for some processes, so in the following, Only the processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol process processing will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the small special hit is not included as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, while the variable display stop of the second special symbol is not included. Since it also includes a small win as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, as a result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, as a small win It is also determined whether or not it has become. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set.

  Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a), and if the small hit flag is set, the state shown in FIG. By selecting the small hit symbol determination table shown in C), the second special symbol random control read out in the second special symbol normal process (not shown) and the selected small hit symbol determination table are compared to change control of the second special symbol. The small hit symbol as the mode at the time of stop (stop symbol of the second special symbol) is determined (step S134a).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (D), the small hit symbol determination table is associated with each random symbol (second random symbol) according to the determination result (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C). Remembered The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small hit by identifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the game ball which is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received by the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening / closing pattern 14 times. Small hit A to control the big hit game state that can enter (easy) one big winning hole 2005, and control to the short time state after the big hit game state ends
2. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the game ball which is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received by the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening / closing pattern nine times. Small hit B to control to the big hit game state that can enter (easy) one big winning opening 2005, and to control to the time saving state after the big hit game state ends
3. After opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when it is detected by the second count sensor 4005b that nine game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b When the game ball which is controlled to the small hitting game state and is received by the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hitting game state is distributed to the V winning hole 2411, the first big winning hole 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first special winning opening 2005, the game ball is closed by repeating the opening / closing pattern four times. Small hitting C which controls to the big hitting game state in which it is possible (easy) to enter the one big winning hole 2005, and controls to the time saving state after the big hitting game state ends

  In the small hit symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, 10 judgment values are distributed when the small hit A is obtained, and 20 judgment values are distributed when the small hit B is obtained, When the hit is C, 70 judgment values are distributed. That is, when a lottery result of a small win is obtained by a lottery based on the second special random number, there is a 10% chance of a small win A, a 20% chance of a small win B, and a 70% probability of a small win. It becomes B.

  In addition, when the result of the lottery for small win is obtained, the game balls accepted by the second special winning opening 2005b are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state according to the type of small hit. The gaming state after the jackpot gaming state that occurs is determined. Then, in the big hit control process (step S40), the big hit game state is controlled based on that the game balls accepted by the second big winning hole 2005b during the small hit game state are distributed to the V winning hole 2411. After that, the setting process of the time saving flag is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit A" has been obtained, after the big hit game state for 15 rounds is executed, the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is shortened until it is executed once. When the state is controlled and it is determined that a small hit of "small hit B" has been obtained, after the big hit game state for 10 rounds is executed, the time saving until the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once Controlled to the state, when it is determined that the small hit of "small hit C" is obtained, after the big hit game state for 5 rounds is executed, it is shortened until the symbol fluctuation of the special symbol is executed once. Controlled by the state.

  In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, if the small hit A is determined, the small hit symbol is determined as the small hit A symbol, and if the small hit B is determined, the small hit symbol is selected as the small hit symbol B symbol. If it is determined and the small hit C is decided, the small hit C design is decided as the small hit design.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  When the big hit flag is not set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S141a), and the small hit flag is set (step S143a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects the time of the small hit. A fluctuation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal processing (step S148a), and the peripheral control board 1510 starts the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command to be notified to is set and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 1405 is started (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S150a). Thereby, the variation display control of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display device 1405 only for the variation time determined in this way, and the production control is performed on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process process (step S39).

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S186a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that if the small hit flag is set (step S190a), the small hit game state is started. The small hit start command is set (step S191a), and the waiting time until the start of the small hit game state (the time for displaying that the small hit game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, a small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of small hit. In step S191a, a small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) corresponding to the type of small hit (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) is set. .. As a result, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like perform the effect of the small hit game state according to the type of the small hit instructed by the small hit start command.

  In addition, the small hitting execution flag which indicates that the small hitting game state is being executed, when the small hitting game state is ended, specifically, the small hitting mid-range process of the small hitting control process (step S41) described later (step S41). In step S401), the opening / closing control of the second special winning opening 2005b according to the type of the small hit (for example, if it is "small hit C", after opening the second special winning opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or It is reset when the opening / closing control for closing when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second special winning opening 2005b). While the small hit execution flag is reset, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process process (step S14), while the first special symbol display 1403 is first. The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405 can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the process proceeds to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. Special control (first special design, second special design) based on the fact that the mode when the variable display stopped becomes a big hit design, the peripheral control board is notified to the player that the big hit game state is entered. Pre-processing for opening the special winning opening that waits until it is performed by 1510 or waits until the next round starts (step S91)
2. The first special winning opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the variation display of the special symbol is a big hit symbol, or the first big winning opening 2005 is started based on the start of the next round. Is controlled to an open state, and after opening the first big winning opening 2005 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or that 9 game balls have been won in the first big winning opening 2005, the first count sensor 4005a Processing during opening of special winning opening to be closed when detected (step S92)
3. When all the rounds are finished, the big winning opening opening post-processing is waited until the peripheral control board 1510 informs the player that the jackpot gaming state is finished (step S93).
The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S91) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hit control process (step S41). In the small hitting process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hitting process flag.

1. Small hitting start processing which executes the setting processing for starting the small hitting game state (step S400)
2. Small hit processing during small hit (step S401) which monitors the entering and opening time of the game ball in the game state

  The small hit process flag is operated to indicate that the small hit start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting start process (step S400).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the standby time until the start of the small hitting game state as the process of step S411, and if this interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412). ) The processing is terminated without executing the subsequent processing. The interval timer is set based on that the small hit flag is set when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop process).

  On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second special winning opening 2005b is set in the opening timer (step S413), and after the small hit opening time effect command is set (step S413). (S415), the second big winning opening 2005b is controlled to the open state (step S416).

  After that, when the small hitting process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hitting process (step S401) (step S417), this process ends.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting process (step S401).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b by the second count sensor 4005b reaches "9" as the processing of step S421. When it is determined that the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b has reached “9”, the process proceeds to step S427.

  If the number of game balls received in the second special winning opening 2005b in step S421 has not reached "9", the second special winning opening 2005b is controlled to the open state and then to the closed state. 1 is subtracted from the release timer indicating the release time up to (step S425), it is determined whether the release timer has timed out (step S426), and if it has not timed out (NO in step S426), the subsequent processing If the time is out (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the small hitting in-execution flag (step S427) and controls the opened second big winning opening 2005b to the closed state (step S428).

  At this time, if a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit game state is ended is set (step S430), and until the big hit game state starts. After setting the waiting time of the interval timer to the interval timer (step S431), the jackpot execution flag and the accessory winning flag indicating that the jackpot game state has been set based on V winning during the jackpot game state are set. (Step S432). The prize winning flag is used to determine whether the jackpot game state has been entered or the jackpot pattern has been stopped and the jackpot game state has been entered based on the fact that a V prize has been won during the jackpot game state in the jackpot control process (step S40). When the accessory winning flag is set, when the 15R jackpot gaming state is executed, it is notified as if the second round of the 15R jackpot gaming state, which is executed over 15 rounds, is being executed. The player will recognize that the 15R big hit game state including the small hit game state is being executed.

  Although not shown, in step S431, the number of unexecuted rounds out of the number of big hits according to the type of small hit (the number of remaining rounds when the small hit game state is set to one round (for example, to the V winning opening 2411) Based on the fact that the game ball has entered the 15R big hit game state, if it is a small hit A, the remaining round number is 14 times))), and a process of setting a big hit number counter showing the remaining number of rounds is also executed. As described above, the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 each time the round is executed in the big hit control process, and when the big hit number counter becomes "0", the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 causes the specified number of rounds. Is determined to have been executed and the jackpot gaming state is ended.

  When the process of step S432 is completed and when it is determined that there is no V winning in step S429, at the time when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit start process (step S400) (step (S417), this process ends.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol process processing (step S15).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU1310a of the control board 1310, as the process of step S802, first, the normal random number of the normal symbol is acquired from the random number counter, and the gate unit passing process such as storing it in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM is executed. To do.

  Also, in the processing of step S802a, if it is determined that the detection signal from the right area entrance sensor 4006 is in the ON state and that a game ball has passed through the right area entrance sensor 4006, the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of (1) sets a right area entrance sensor passage command as the processing of step S802. It should be noted that in the normal symbol command control process (step S17), the main control board 1310 transmits a right area part entry sensor passage command to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the game ball passes to the right area part entry sensor 4006. It is possible for the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to recognize that there is such a problem. In the present embodiment, whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 side receives the right area entrance sensor passage command for a predetermined time (10 seconds or 20 seconds) after receiving the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command. Are watching. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, when the right area entrance sensor passage command is not received at the time when a predetermined time (10 seconds or 20 seconds) has elapsed after receiving the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command, A warning effect corresponding to the time is executed on the effect display device 1600. In other words, if the power is cut off during the chance mode, which is the fluctuation of the first special symbol during time saving, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the reception timing of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time designation command (same time) The display in the chance mode on the effect display device 1600 is restarted at the reception timing of the universal figure entraining effect end command or the universal figure entraining effect start command) which is received for a predetermined time period (restart). When it is determined that the right area entrance sensor passage command has not been received for 10 seconds or 20 seconds, that is, the right area entrance sensor 4006 has not detected it and that the right hit has not been made, it responds to the time. The warning effect is executed on the effect display device 1600.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like for the display mode at the time of fluctuation control stop of the above-mentioned normal symbol is performed based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination process (step S804) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device based on the random symbol variation random number.
3. Ordinary symbol variation process to wait until the variation display of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (step S805)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the ordinary symbol display. Normal symbol stop process to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", execute the process for controlling the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004. Ordinary electric accessory release process (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the processing of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the normal reserved number counter indicating the number of ordinary random numbers stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memories of the normal symbol is "4" which is the maximum value.

  In the processing of this step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the above-mentioned normal symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned normal symbols in the suspended state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the process of step S812, the normal hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, in step S813, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as the processing of step S814, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, in the processing of the step S811, when it is determined that the number of storages of the normal symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly suspended. That is, by not performing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (the above-mentioned ordinary random number and the above-mentioned ordinary figure fluctuation random number are not acquired from the above random number counter), the variable display control of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is not newly put on hold.

  Note that the gate passage process (step S802) may be another example described below. For example, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first causes the normal operation. The random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned ordinary reserved number counter is acquired from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, it is judged whether or not the reserved memory number of ordinary symbols is "4" which is its maximum value. To do. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved storage of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not the maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the newly-held state, the above-mentioned ordinary-reserved number counter is incremented (1 is added. ), And then the previously obtained ordinary random number, the universal figure variation random number (the ordinary random number and the universal figure variation random number stored in the temporary storage area) among the storage areas of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. It is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value of the above normal reservation number counter. On the other hand, as a result of acquiring the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that this counter value is "4" which is the maximum value (the holding storage number of the above-mentioned normal symbol is In the case of the maximum value), the normal random number acquired previously, the general pattern fluctuation random number is discarded without storing in the normal symbol holding storage area, and the variable display control of the acquired normal symbol is newly added. It may be possible not to be held.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, based on the ordinary random number and the ordinary variable random number acquired in step S813, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the ordinary symbol is a universal symbol, and is executed normally. Pre-determination information such as the type variation of the symbol variation (type of the universal symbol variation pattern) is executed before the ordinary symbol variation determination process according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is started. After that (step S815), the process ends.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the universal figure advance determination process (step S815). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the universal figure advance determination process, it compares the universal figure advance determination table (not shown) with the random number acquired in step S813, specifically, the ordinary random number or the ordinary variable random number. By this, whether or not to be a universal figure, if it is a universal figure, the type of a universal figure, the mode type of the normal symbol variation to be executed are specified (step S881).

  Then, the specified public figure pre-determination information (whether or not it becomes a public figure, in the case of a general figure, the type of a general figure, the type of mode of the normal symbol variation to be executed, etc.), and the reserved storage of the normal symbol Set the universal figure pre-determination command according to the number (the value of the ordinary hold number counter).

  Then, in the normal symbol command control process (step S17), the main symbol control board 1310 sends a universal symbol advance determination command to the peripheral control substrate 1510, so that in addition to the number of reserved symbols of the regular symbol, the generated gate portion 2003 is generated. Whether or not the display result of the variation display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game sphere is to be a universal symbol, if it is a universal symbol, the type of regular symbol, the type of mode of ordinary symbol variation to be executed, etc. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the figure pre-determination information before the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is started.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the general figure advance determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the general figure advance determination information indicated by the received general figure advance determination command. There is. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a general figure reservation storage area for storing general figure preliminary determination information.

  Further, the universal figure reservation storage area has storage areas 1 to 4 corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the first universal figure predetermination information indicated by the received universal figure predetermination command to the first (maximum). The data is stored in order from the first storage area. When the universal figure advance determination information is stored in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, when the universal figure advance determination command is received, the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is notified. The general figure pre-determination information is stored, and when the general figure variation pattern command for notifying the start of variable display of ordinary symbols is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the general figure reservation storage area according to the received universal figure variation pattern command. The general figure a priori determination information is discarded and the general figure a priori determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area is stored in the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) storage area. To (shift the universal figure preliminary determination information stored in the universal figure reservation storage area). As a result, the general figure prior determination information of the normal symbol is stored so that the order in which the suspension of the normal symbol variation occurs can be specified and is discarded in order from the earliest universal symbol prior determination information.

  In this way, when the normal symbol fluctuation is put on hold, the normal symbol fluctuation is maintained in the unexecuted state (holding status), but the normal symbol per expectation degree of the normal symbol fluctuation (pseudo) With regard to the winning probability), it is possible to notify this at a predetermined timing, for example, when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold exhaustion is performed. become. Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the universal figure advance determination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the normal symbols is the normal win during the chance mode, the effect suggesting that the normal win is achieved. If a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute, and the result of the lottery is determined to execute an effect that suggests a normal win, the universal figure hold display area 1609 (FIG. 165) corresponding to the universal figure advance determination command The display mode of (see) is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode and displayed. In this example, a circle filled in blue is displayed as a normal display mode of the universal figure reservation display area 1609, and a circle filled in red is displayed as a special mode different from normal. Incidentally, the peripheral control MPU1511a does not actually win normally even when it receives the universal figure advance determination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the ordinary symbol is normally lost during the chance mode. A lottery is performed to determine whether or not to perform an effect that suggests a win, and if the result of the lottery is to decide to execute an effect that suggests a normal win, a universal figure corresponding to the universal figure pre-determination command The display mode of the figure reservation display area 1609 is changed to a special mode for display. However, when the result of the lottery process (ordinary judgment) for the ordinary symbols is a normal loss, the result of the lottery process (ordinary judgment) for the ordinary symbols is a normal win when the universal symbol advance determination command indicating that it is a normal loss is received. The proportion determined to execute the effect suggesting that the normal hit is lower than that in the case of receiving the general figure advance determination command indicating that the special figure is displayed in the general figure hold display area 1609. If it is done, it is possible to improve the expectation for the normal hit, and thus the big hit of the second special symbol.

  Also, the effect suggesting that the normal hit is not limited to the above-mentioned ones, but a special sound (for example, a pico-picone or the like) is output based on the reception of the universal figure advance determination command, or the normal hit. If the effect suggesting that is not performed, no sound may be output, or a sound (pico-clip etc.) different from a special sound may be output), the door frame 3 or the game board 5 The special lighting pattern for the lamps, LEDs, etc. provided in the (there is not to turn on the lamps, LEDs, etc. when the production that does not suggest that it is a normal hit is not performed, while it is suggested that it is a normal hit. If you want to execute the effect that you want to do, blink the lamp, LED, etc. multiple times in a short time) or special emission color (if you do not perform the effect that suggests that it is a normal hit, the lamp or LED While turning on in blue, when performing an effect that suggests that it is a normal hit, such as turning on the lamp or LED etc. in red) is performed. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of these may be executed to execute an effect that suggests a normal hit.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S821, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, next, as the processing of step S822, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, while counting down the normal holding number counter, when the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal holding storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area are stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). ..

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the universal figure collision determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The universal figure hit determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, in the ordinary figure per hit determination table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, one kind of ordinary random number coincides with the ordinary figure per hit determination value indicating that the ordinary figure is won, and 19 kinds of ordinary random numbers are common. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-drawing misjudgment value indicating that the drawing is lost.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the ordinary figure permutation determination table with the ordinary random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal processing, and determines that the ordinary figure per hit (step S829), The variation per winning symbol is selected for the universal symbol, and the universal symbol flag is set (step S830), and the regular symbol variation control stop mode (normal symbol stop symbol) is determined as the universal symbol per symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal design is not hit, the general design lost design is determined as the mode (normal design stop design) when the variation control of the normal design is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the ordinary symbols is performed in this way, as a process of step S834, the lottery result (instruction of either normal figure or loss) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Set the universal figure determination result notification command according to each result. Then, after that, as the process of step S835, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804), this process ends.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the time saving flag set. If (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving shown in FIG. 157 is selected (step S842), and if the time saving flag is set (step S841), normal for non-time saving shown in FIG. 157. The symbol variation pattern determination table is selected (step S843).

  Then, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol to be executed (general symbol variation pattern) is determined by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read out in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process (step S844). ), The general pattern fluctuation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal pattern fluctuation in the determined general pattern fluctuation pattern, and the variable display of the normal symbol displayed on the normal pattern display 1402 is started ( Step S845). Peripheral control MPU1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is the normal symbol determination result notification command set in step S834 of the normal symbol normal process and the normal symbol variation pattern command set in step S845 of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process. By receiving the variable display of the normal symbol from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol until the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, and the variation control stop mode of the normal symbol (stop symbol of the normal symbol) is specified and directed. A variable display of the normal symbol is started on the display device 1600, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol specified from the general symbol determination result notification command is displayed when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol specified from the general symbol fluctuation pattern command has elapsed. It is displayed on the device 1600.

  Further, when the main control MPU 1310a determines the universal figure variation pattern, the main control MPU 1310a sets the universal figure variation time corresponding to the determined universal figure variation pattern in the universal figure variation timer (step S846). As a result, production control is performed by the ordinary symbol display device 1402 (variable display of ordinary symbol) and the above-mentioned effect display device 1600 (variable display of decorative ordinary symbol) only for the universal symbol variation time according to the determined universal symbol variation pattern. Will be done.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 157, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving are provided. Then, in the non-time saving ordinary symbol fluctuation pattern determination table, the distribution of the judgment value is set to be different as compared with the ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination table in the time saving, so that the regular symbol fluctuation time of the normal symbol is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 157, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving is determined for the time saving loss variation pattern set to 2 seconds as the universal symbol variation time when the normal symbol is lost. While the distribution of values is set, in the non-time saving ordinary pattern variation pattern determination table, the non-time saving loss variation pattern 1 is set to 4 seconds as the normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol is lost. The determination value is assigned to the non-time saving time loss variation pattern 2 set to 5 seconds. That is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time saving is set so that the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short compared to the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time saving. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a, during the change of the first special symbol at the time saving time (during the chance mode), and the power shutdown occurs when not normally changing the symbol, after power-on (after power restoration), When the variation display of a new normal symbol is started during the variation of the restarted first special symbol (step S846a), the remaining time of 120 seconds which is the variation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time, Above 0 seconds less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, which corresponds to the period, the variation timer of the first special symbol (first special symbol variation time) variation timer From the above, the special figure 1 remaining variable time designation command corresponding to the remaining time is set (step S846b). As a result, even when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the special display 1 remaining fluctuation is started on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation display of a new normal symbol is started after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). According to the time designation command, the effect display regarding the approximate remaining time in the chance mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, if the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is saved in the main control built-in RAM by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). When the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving is restarted in the recovery process, the recovery process for recovering the state corresponding to the information is executed (return to the chance mode) In the case), the fact that it has been restored is stored. Then, in step S846a, based on the restored memory, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is changing, and the restarted first special symbol is determined. At the time when it is determined that a new variable display of the normal pattern is started during the change of, the restored memory is deleted.

  Further, when the variable display control of the normal symbol is started, next, as the process of step S847, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the above-mentioned normal symbol variation process (step S805), this The process ends.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S851, In step S846, the universal figure fluctuation timer in which the universal figure fluctuation time is set is decremented by 1. Then, when the universal figure variation time timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the variation time of the ordinary symbol has elapsed (step S852), the processing of the following steps S853 to S856 will be performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S853, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display device 1402, the effect display device 1600 normally. A universal figure stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decoration ordinary symbol according to the stop symbol of the symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S854). In addition, in step S853, as a time for maintaining the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, a predetermined universal symbol fixing time (0.5 seconds in this example) is set in the universal symbol stop timer 1. (Step S855). Thereby, after stopping the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 1402, the normal symbol display device 1402 is controlled to display the stop symbol of the normal symbol for a predetermined public symbol determination time.

  Further, the main control MPU1310a, during the change of the first special symbol at the time saving time (during the chance mode), and the power interruption occurs during the change of the normal symbol, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), it is restarted. When ending the variation display of the normal symbol (variation display of the normal symbol restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored)) during the variation of the first special symbol (step S855a), the first special for saving time The remaining time out of 120 seconds which is the variation time of the symbol, 0 seconds or less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, which one of the periods, the first special symbol The variation timer of the variation time (first special figure variation time) is determined, and the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command corresponding to the remaining time is set (step S855b). As a result, even when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the special display 1 remaining fluctuations are finished on the effect display device 1600 when the fluctuation display of the ordinary symbols restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is finished. According to the time designation command, the effect display regarding the approximate remaining time in the chance mode is performed.

  In the present embodiment, if the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, it is saved in the main control built-in RAM by the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). When the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving is restarted in the recovery process, the recovery process for recovering the state corresponding to the information is executed (return to the chance mode) In the case), the fact that it has been restored is stored. Then, in step S855a, based on the restored memory, it is determined whether or not the first special symbol restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is changing, and the restarted first special symbol is determined. When it is determined that the fluctuation display of the normal symbol (the fluctuation display of the normal symbol restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored)) is ended during the fluctuation of, the restored memory is erased.

  Then, next, in the process of step S856, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop processing (step S806). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S861, In step S855 of the above-mentioned ordinary symbol variation processing, the universal figure stop timer in which a predetermined universal figure fixed time is set is decremented by 1. Then, the universal figure stop timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the predetermined regular figure fixed time has elapsed (step S862), the display control of the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. With the end of the process, a universal figure finalization command for instructing finalized display of the display result of the decorative ordinary symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600 is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. Yes (step S863).

  Then, next, when the universal figure hitting flag is set (step S864), a second starting opening corresponding to the current game state is used by using the universal figure hitting opening pattern table shown in FIG. 155 (B). The advancing / retreating pattern of the door 2022 is set (step S865).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of opening, the advance / retreat pattern A is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening door 2022. To do. That is, if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in the non-time saving state at the start of the forward / backward movement, the second starting opening door 2022 will be short when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number is obtained as a drawing. The advancing / retreating pattern A that moves forward / backward in the advancing / retreating mode (0.2 seconds in this example) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the current game state is controlled to the time saving state at the start of the forward / backward movement of the second starting opening door 2022, the forward / backward pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second starting opening door 2022. That is, if the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in a time saving state at the time of starting the advancing / retreating operation, the second starting opening door 2022 moves forward / backward when the lottery result based on the ordinary random number yields the result of drawing. The advancing / retreating pattern B for advancing / retreating in the mode (6 seconds in this example) is executed.

  When the advancing / retreating pattern of the second starting door 2022 is set, next, as a process of step S886, a universal figure start command indicating that the universal figure per game is started is set, and an ordinary symbol process flag is an ordinary electric role. At the time of updating so that the process shifts to the object release process (step S867), this process ends. Note that the universal figure start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the universal figure game according to the type of universal figure instructed by the universal figure start command is the effect display device 1600. It is executed by a lamp / LED and a speaker.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the normal symbol process flag so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process, which is the initial value, when the ordinary symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary electric auditors product opening process (step S807).

  Now, in the processing of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state and the second starting opening 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310, when a predetermined time (opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the advance / retreat pattern set in step S865) has elapsed after starting the opening state of the second starting port 2004 (step S872), When the second starting opening door 2022 is moved backward to control the opening second opening opening 2004 (step S873), this process is terminated.

  Further, in the process of step S871, if it is determined that the second starting opening door 2022 is in the retracted state and the second starting opening 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310 advances the second start port door 2022 to move the second start port door 2022 forward when the timing to open the second start port door 2022 is reached (step S874). When is controlled to the open state (step S875), this process ends.

  Further, if it is determined in the process of step S871 that it is not the timing to open the second starting port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is When the number of opening of the starting port 2004 reaches a predetermined number (the number of times of opening / closing operation of the second starting port door 2022 in the advancing / retreating pattern set in step S865) (step S876), the universal figure end command is set (step S877). ). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S878), this process ends. It should be noted that the universal figure hit end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the universal figure end command, the effect display device 1600, the effect of the universal figure hit game being executed by the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like. To finish.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, the processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure of control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 161, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs initial setting processing (step S501). In this initial setting process, a process of clearing the RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 and the like are performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) ends, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed when 16 mS has elapsed. The flag T is set, and the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is reset (set to 0). In this way, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to "1" every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to "0". When the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (16 mS elapsed flag T is "1"), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process is completed, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, when the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is "0"), the loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of steps S601 to S606. In the command analysis processing of step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the effect is generated based on the reception of the change pattern command transmitted by being set in the change pattern setting process (step S149 of the first change pattern setting process, the second change pattern setting process). A control process relating to the display device 1600 is executed.

  Further, in the sound control processing of step S603, control processing relating to the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control processing of step S604, control processing relating to the lamp / LED provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process of step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp drive board 4170 is executed. In the random number updating process of step S606, a process of updating the random number used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  Note that the processing of steps S601 to S606 in the 16 mS steady processing ends within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady-state process to the end of the 16 mS steady-state process, the 16 mS steady-state process is immediately started from the beginning when 16 mS has elapsed since the 16 mS steady-state process was started (command of step S601. Do not execute (from parsing process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined that the 16 mS elapse flag is set in step S502 after the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is executed. To start.

  Further, in this embodiment, the random number updating process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers, but the timing (timing) of updating various random numbers is not limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in either or both of the loop process and the 16 mS steady process in the sub-main process.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the production control process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the production process flag indicating the progress status of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be done.

1. A variation pattern command (first variation pattern command that indicates a variation pattern of the first special symbol, a second variation pattern) instructing a variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by the command analysis process. After performing a process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, and the like based on a second change pattern command for instructing a change pattern of the special symbol, the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the change effect mid-process. Change production start processing to change to (step S711)
2. The elapsed time from the start of control of the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and the process of controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol ( (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) The fluctuation production inside processing which changes the production process flag to the value which responds to fluctuation end processing according to the fluctuation time which responds to fluctuation pattern of (2nd special design) (step S712)
3. Performs a process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command instructing the variable display stop of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and if it is lost, the above effect Variable production end processing that changes the process flag to a value according to the variation production start processing, if it is a big hit, to a value according to the big hit production processing, and if it is a small hit, to a value according to the small hit production processing (Step S713)
4. Based on receiving the big hit start command for instructing the start of the big hit game state, the effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the big hit game state, and when the big hit game state is ended, the above-mentioned effect process Big hit production processing which changes the flag to a value according to the variation production start processing (step S714)
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command for instructing the start of the small hit game state, processing for executing display control during the small hit game state is performed on the effect display device 1600, and the second during the small hit game state. If the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005b is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the big hit effect starting process when the small hit game state is finished, and the game ball is If it is not assigned to the V winning opening 2411, a small hit production process of changing to a value according to the variation production start process (step S715)

  Special symbol display device (first special symbol display device 1403, second special symbol display device 1405) by the above-described processing is performed in synchronization with the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). The variable display of the decorative pattern is executed on the display device 1600.

[11. About games in chance mode and exercise time of winning rights]
In this embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, shifts to the chance mode. The game proceeds to the winning right exercising time due to the occurrence of the second reserved memory, but the game in such a chance mode and the winning right exercising time will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-time saving state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first big winning opening 2005 is given as each round game in the big hit gaming state. In the open state (retracted state), in order to enter a large amount of game balls into the first winning opening 2005 that has been opened, the game balls must be driven in succession to the right side of the center character 2500. As described above, when the game ball is driven into the right side of the center role object 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 always move forward and backward. The game ball enters the inside of the constantly driving door 2021 and the winning of the game ball into the first right starting opening 2002b occurs. For this reason, during the big hit game state, one or more gaming balls with a high probability win the first right starting opening 2002b, and are held as the first reserved memory number which is the memory number for the hit determination on the first special symbol side. It is supposed to be done.

  On the other hand, during the big hit game state, it is not controlled to the time saving state (is controlled to the non-time saving state), so it is temporarily determined whether or not it is a universal figure hit based on the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 (normal determination). As a result, even if the universal symbol is stopped and displayed and the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 moves forward and backward, the advance / retreat mode is such that there is almost no acceptance of game balls into the second starting opening 2004. As a result, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first special symbol is variably displayed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol. In most cases, after the big hit game state, first the first special symbol. Will be variably displayed.

  Next, when the 10R big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, it is controlled to a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state. At this time, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, as a variation time of the first special symbol, a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. The variable display will be displayed. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time, a game aiming at the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

  When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 during the chance mode described above, it is determined whether or not it is a universal symbol (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. At this time, in the variable display of the normal symbol, the variable display is performed in any of 2 to 21 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol set as the universal symbol variation pattern. That is, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed for a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), it is possible to make a normal determination up to about 60 times.

  Further, in the case where the normal symbol stop mode in the chance mode described above is the universal symbol hit symbol, the second starting opening door 2022 in the time saving state is controlled to be in the protruding state for 6 seconds as the opening time. (2) The game ball can be received in the starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases, and the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. Will be done.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, if a small hit occurs as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even one game ball is accepted in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit game state. One of the balls is always assigned to the V winning opening 2411. Further, in this example, if the right hit is continued during the small hitting game state, at least one ball is controlled to be received in the second big winning opening 2005b. That is, in the case of a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, it is a big hit in most cases, so it is practically a small hit as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. It can be said that they have acquired the right to become a big hit (winning right).

  In the chance mode of this example, there is shown a case where a normal symbol is stopped and displayed twice as a regular symbol. In such a case, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door 2022 is in the protruding state, respectively, and is the second number of hit judgments stored on the second special symbol side. The number of reserved memories has increased by 2, and the right to be a big hit (winning right) has been obtained twice. In addition, in the chance mode of this example, in addition to performing the ordinary determination about 20 to 40 times, the probability that the result of the ordinary determination will be a symbol per ordinary figure is set to 1/20. The average number of second reserved memories is increased by one or two, and the right to be a big hit (winning right) can be acquired once or twice.

  Then, when the variable symbol is stopped as the symbol aspect according to the result of the hit determination with the first special symbol when the long variation time has elapsed after the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the state shifts to the non-time saving state. At the same time, the winning right exercise time is entered based on the fact that there are two second retained memories. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, since the variable display of the second special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol when there is the second retained memory number, when the winning right exercise time is entered, the first retained memory number Regardless of whether or not there is a variable display of the second special symbol based on the second pending storage. At this time, in the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the non-time saving state.

  During the winning right exercising time of this example, a case where the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol is shown. In such a case, the small hitting game state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b in a state in which the game ball can be accepted, and the game ball winning the second big winning hole 2005b is distributed to the V winning hole 2411. The big hit game state is executed on the condition that it has been done, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (retracted state) as each round game of the big hit game state.

  In addition, when the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hitting game state executed based on the fact that the second special symbol is the small hitting symbol, it is always in the time saving state after the big hitting game state ends. Control. Also, after the first big hit game state in the winning right exercising time, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the second second reserved memory. At this time, in the variable display of the second special symbol, similarly to the non-time saving state, the variable display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the time saving state. When the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol, the small hit game state is executed to make the second special winning opening 2005b in a state in which the game ball can be received, and the second big winning opening 2005b. On the condition that the game ball that has won the prize is distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the second big-hit game state in the winning right exercising time is executed.

  In addition, after the second big hit game state in the winning right exercising time, the time saving state is continued and the mode shifts to the chance mode again. That is, as long as the normal determination is won in the chance mode, it is possible to continue the advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode.

  In addition, when the time saving state occurs in the state where there is no first reserved memory number after the big hit game state, the game ball is won in the second start port 2004 before the game ball is won in the first right start port 2002b. There is. In this case, the variation of the second special symbol is displayed, and the big hit game state (the second big winning hole 2005bb is won during the small hit game state is generated by being stopped and displayed in the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol. After the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 (including the big hit game state executed on the condition) only once, the mode shifts to the chance mode again. That is, when the gaming ball wins the second starting opening 2004 before the gaming ball wins the first right starting opening 2002b after the jackpot gaming state without the first reserved memory number, in other words, in other words When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed before the variable display of the first special symbol and the time saving state occurs in the state where there is no first reserved memory number after the jackpot game state, the right to be a jackpot substantially ( The winning right) can be obtained only once.

  On the other hand, in the case where the time saving state is generated with the first reserved memory number after the big hit game state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 hardly occurs during the big hit game state as described above. After the big hit game state, the first special symbol shifts to the chance mode in which it is variably displayed in a long variation time. During this chance mode, even if the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 occurs, the game to the second starting port 2004 is continued until the variable display of the first special symbol that is being executed in the long variable time is stopped. The variable display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the ball is in a standby state (pending). That is, during the chance mode, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 occurs a plurality of times, so that the variable display of the second special symbol becomes a standby state (held), and the right to substantially become a big hit ( You can win the winning right) multiple times.

  In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example displays the variable display of the second special symbol in preference to the first special symbol when there is the second reserved memory number, and further adds the second reserved memory number in the time saving state. While performing the control to facilitate winning the game ball to the second starting opening 2004, the variation of the second special symbol before the variation display of the first special symbol when the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state When the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed before the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the right to be a big hit (winning right) is more likely to be obtained multiple times. Is becoming In other words, in the normal state, mainly the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and in the time saving state, while mainly performing the variable display of the second special symbol, the variable display of the first special symbol in the time saving state. When is executed, there is a high possibility that the right to be a big hit (winning right) is obtained more than once than when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this way, it is possible to realize a novel game property in which a highly advantageous state occurs when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed mainly in the time saving state when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, It is possible to prevent a decline in the entertainment appeal.

  Further, during the variation display of the first special symbol in the long fluctuation time in the time saving state (during the chance mode), in the situation where the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 occurs only once, the second special symbol Although the same profit as when the variable display of is executed (the right to substantially win the jackpot (winning right) is obtained once) is only given to the player, but to the second start opening 2004 for the second time. When the winning of the game ball occurs, the degree of profit given to the player at that time becomes larger than that when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. As a result, while paying attention to the remaining period of the variable display of the first special symbol in the long fluctuation time in the time saving state, the degree of profit that the player can obtain in the fluctuation process of the first special symbol in the long fluctuation time changes It is possible to realize a new game property of playing, and in this respect as well, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, when there is a second number of reserved memories at the time when the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, the variable display of the first special symbol is given priority over the first special symbol by performing the variable display of the second special symbol. In order to prevent the frequent occurrence of the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variability time, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous and having a high gambling level. .

[12. About display contents of production display device]
FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing display contents of the effect display device 1600 in the chance mode. During the normal mode, the decorative design 1605 (left decorative design 1605a, middle decorative design 1605b, right decorative design 1605c) consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right in the center of the effect display device 1600 is enlarged and displayed, and the first special design. The variable display is displayed in synchronization with the variable display of. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, in the chance mode, as in the normal mode, the decorative pattern 1605 consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol 1605 is not variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol, and is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol.

  In the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 that variably displays the first special symbol corresponding decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variation of the second special symbol. A second special figure corresponding decorative display area 1607 for variably displaying the second special figure corresponding decorative pattern corresponding to the display is provided. The first special figure-corresponding decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure-corresponding decoration display area 1607 are also displayed during the normal mode, and are displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 during the normal mode. Even when a character or the like is displayed instead of the decorative pattern that is present, or when the decorative pattern displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode is synchronized with the variable display of the ordinary pattern, The state of variable display of special symbols and second special symbols can be confirmed.

  Further, in the lower right part of the effect display device 1600, a universal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 is provided which variably displays the ordinary figure corresponding decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the ordinary symbol. The ordinary figure corresponding decoration display area 1608 is displayed during the normal mode as well as the first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607. When the decorative design displayed in the central part is synchronized with the variable display of the first special design, or during the chance mode, the decorative design displayed in the central part of the effect display device 1600 is replaced with a character or the like. Even in the case of doing, it is possible to confirm the state of the variable display of the normal symbols.

  Further, at the left end portion of the effect display device 1600, provided are general symbol hold display areas 1609a to 1609d for displaying the number of reserved storages of normal symbols corresponding to the ordinary random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage area. At the right end of 1600, second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d for displaying the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are provided. It should be noted that, as described above, the state in which there is the second reserved memory number is a state in which the right to substantially win the jackpot (winning right) is acquired, so that the game ball is accepted into the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode. By displaying the number of second holding memories with a star mark, it is possible to recognize that a special holding has occurred.

  Further, during the chance mode, a timer display area 1611 for displaying the remaining time in the chance mode is displayed below the effect display device 1600. As described above, the chance mode is controlled over the period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long variation time (120 seconds), and within this period, the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003. A game is played aiming at the hitting of the general public. The timer display area 1611 displays the remaining time by a countdown method, and the player is irritated and anxious by aiming for the occurrence of a general figure while being aware of the remaining time of the chance mode displayed in the timer display area 1611. If you play a game in a state of being hugged and excited, and if a universal hit occurs and the game ball is accepted into the second starting opening 2004, you can give a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction, Is improved.

  Further, during the chance mode, a mode information display area 1612 is displayed in the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600. This mode information display area 1612 notifies the player that the player is in the chance mode and right-handed, so that the player does not suffer any disadvantage.

[13. About production in chance mode]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is a more advantageous state than the normal mode, shifts. Effects using the effect display device 1600 in such a chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. 166.

  First, during the chance mode, when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, it is determined whether or not it is a universal symbol (ordinary determination), and in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol based on this determination result, the effect is produced. The display device 1600 displays a variable display of the decorative pattern. Then, when the stop pattern of the normal symbol is the universal symbol, the hit symbol is also displayed in the stop pattern of the decorative symbol, and the ball can enter the second starting opening 2004. At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the memory number for the hit determination on the second special symbol side, increases.

  Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is displayed in a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), the remaining 10 seconds before the long variation time elapses (the variation of the first special symbol). At the stage of 110 seconds after starting the display), it is determined whether or not there is a second reserved memory number, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side. Then, in the remaining 10 seconds, if there is the second reserved memory number, the effect of whether or not the stop mode of the decorative symbol is the winning symbol is continued as it is, and after the elapse of the long variation time, the (Ii) Transition to the time for exercising the right to win the election based on the fact that there is a reserved memory number.

  On the other hand, when there is no second reserved memory number in the remaining 10 seconds before the long variation time elapses, as a presentation using the presentation display device 1600, the decoration pattern stop mode hits. Instead of the effect of becoming a symbol, the effect of whether or not the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped at the big hit symbol is executed. Specifically, the production (last battle production) is developed in a battle format as the production of whether or not the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped by the big hit symbol.

  Then, if the first special symbol in the variable display is stopped by the big hit symbol, you win the battle in the last battle production when the long fluctuation time elapses, and then the variable display of the first special symbol stops at the big hit symbol. The jackpot gaming state is executed based on what is done.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol in variable display is stopped due to a missing symbol, you lose the battle in the last battle production when the long variation time elapses, and the last battle production is in progress (long variation time elapses). It is determined whether or not the second number of pending storages has increased in the remaining 10 seconds (before the execution). That is, in the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second reserved memory number, but when the long fluctuation time has elapsed after the remaining 10 seconds, the second reserved memory number. Judge whether or not there is.

  Then, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, which is before the elapse of the long variation time, there is no second reserved storage number, but when there is the second reserved storage number at the time when the long variation time elapses, After the battle is defeated in the final battle production, the revival production to win the battle is executed, and after that, the winning right exercising time is shifted based on the second number of retained memories. In addition, when executing the revival production, from the time when the long variation time has passed (at the time of losing the battle in the last battle production), the variation display of the second special symbol that is subsequently started based on the second reserved memory. In, in the period until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the elapse of the long variation time, there is no second pending storage number, and when the long variation time has elapsed and there is no second pending storage number, The defeat of the battle in the final battle production will not be overridden, and then the normal mode (non-time saving state) will be entered based on the fact that there is no second reserved memory number.

[14. Concerning the secrecy of the second hold memory during the chance mode and the exercise time of winning rights]
In this embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big hit is won in the normal mode, and the time saving state occurs after the big hit game state, so that the chance mode, which is more advantageous than the normal mode, shifts to the chance mode. If a second hold storage occurs during the second hold storage, it is notified when the second hold storage occurs, but if a predetermined confidentiality condition is satisfied, the second hold storage occurs However, the fact is not notified, and the fact is notified at a predetermined timing after the second hold storage occurs.

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, of the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the main control internal RAM The value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number is incremented by "1" and the second reserved memory number displayed on the second special reserved number indicator 1406 is increased by "1". Further, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control board 1510, when the predetermined concealment condition is not satisfied, based on the special symbol 2 storage command (second reserved number designating command) for instructing the second reserved memory number, the second By grasping that the number of reserved storages has increased by "1", the second number of reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is increased by "1". The special symbol 2 storage command is a command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 when the second reserved storage number changes. That is, when the second reserve memory number is increased by "1" based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004, and based on the start of the variable display control of the second special symbol. When the number of reserved memories decreases by "1", the special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and it is possible to grasp whether or not the second number of reserved memories has increased.

  On the other hand, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510, when the predetermined concealment condition is satisfied, based on the special symbol 2 storage command (second reserved number designation command) for instructing the second reserved memory number, (2) Although it is grasped that the number of reserved storages has increased by "1", the number of second reserved storages displayed on the effect display device 1600 is maintained without being increased by "1".

  Specifically, when the concealment condition is satisfied when the second hold storage occurs, the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the small hit game state or the big hit game state during the winning right exercising time. An example is a case of sphere (see Specific Example 1 described later). Also, the variation display of the normal symbol is started immediately before the end of the big hit game state before the start of the chance mode, and the second start opening is based on the normal symbol being stopped and displayed as the normal hit symbol after the end of the big hit game state. 2004 is in a ball enterable state, and a case where a game ball enters the second start opening 2004 in the ball enterable state (see Specific Example 2 described later). In addition, in the entry possible state of the second starting opening 2004 in the chance mode, in the entry possible state of the first time (the opening of the second starting opening 2004 once), the second starting opening 2004 and the following The case where the game ball of is entered (refer to Specific Example 3 described later).

  When the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied and the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed, when the predetermined timing comes, the fact that the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed is notified. There is. In the present embodiment, as the timing (notification timing) for notifying that the occurrence of the second hold storage is concealed, "A: Last battle effect, rehabilitation effect after defeat", "B: 4 rounds in jackpot game state" "Eye button effect", "C: Continuation effect in the ending period of the big hit game state or the small hit game state" is provided, and the game situation when the occurrence of the second hold memory is hidden (is it in the chance mode? Based on the number of concealed second pending memories, the number of non-concealed second pending memories (the number of disclosed second pending memories), It is supposed that the fact that the occurrence of the second hold storage is concealed is notified at a predetermined notification timing of the notification timings A to C (for example, the earliest possible notification timing). The notification timing is not limited to a predetermined one, but may be randomly set by performing a lottery or the like to determine the notification timing.

  As an example, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the small hitting game state or the big hitting game state during the winning right exercising time, the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed. For example, when the concealment results in one concealed second holding memory, when the ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) at the end of the big hit game state comes, the ending effect performed in the normal time Instead, one of the concealed second holding memories is notified by executing a continuation effect described below (see Specific Example 1 described below). In addition, as a result of the concealment, when there are a plurality of concealed second reserved memories (for example, two concealed second reserved memories), the ending period at the end of the jackpot gaming state (book (5 seconds in the embodiment) arrives, the second concealed storage that was concealed first is notified, and in the 4th round button effect (later described) in the big hit game state that was started next, the concealed second (Ii) It is supposed to inform about the pending storage.

  Further, when the second reserved memory is generated in the chance mode, if all of the generated second reserved memory is concealed, the remaining before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time). A revival effect that loses the battle in the last battle effect (see FIG. 166) executed in the period of 10 seconds, but reverses from the loss of the battle and wins the battle after the end of the chance mode (after a long variation time). By executing the above, it is notified that the occurrence of the second pending storage is concealed (see Specific Example 2 described later). Further, if all of the second reserved memories generated during the chance mode are concealed, and if there are two or more concealed second reserved memories, the first second in the above-mentioned revival effect is performed. In addition to notifying that the occurrence of the reserved memory is hidden, by executing the button effect during the execution of the big hit game state during the winning right exercising time, the second reserved memory is generated. It informs that it is confidential. Specifically, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600 during execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time. For example, in the fourth round, the second pending storage is performed. The button effect (additional effect) that notifies whether or not the occurrence of is hidden is executed. In such a button effect, when the operation button 410 is operated, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden, and when the operation button 410 is not operated, the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden. Do not let you know that In addition, the button effect may be executed even when the occurrence of the second reserved memory is not hidden. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is operated in the button effect, the occurrence of the second reserved memory is hidden. It is supposed to inform that it has not been done. In addition, after the notification that the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is hidden, if the occurrence of the second reserved memory is still confidential, the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time is executed. The button effect is executed each time the notification is made, thereby sequentially notifying that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden.

  Further, in the case where the second reserved storage is generated in the chance mode, a part of the generated second reserved storage is concealed (for example, when one of the two second reserved memories is concealed). Since there is an item in which the occurrence of the second hold memory is not kept secret (a notification of that fact when the second hold memory occurs) exists, the last battle effect is not executed. In such a case, by executing the above-mentioned button effect (additional effect) during the execution of the big hit game state during the winning right exercise time, it is notified that the occurrence of the second holding memory is concealed. (See Specific Example 3 described later). In addition, after the fact that the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed, if the occurrence of the second reserved memory is still concealed, every time the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time is executed. By executing the button effect, it is sequentially notified that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden.

  As described above, while the jackpot gaming state is being executed during the winning right exercising time, it may be notified that the occurrence of the second holding memory is hidden, but during the winning right exercising time, Even while executing the small hitting game state based on the special symbol being stopped and displayed in the small hitting pattern, it is not possible to enter the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting game state, and the big hitting game state May not occur. In such a case, after the end of the small hitting game state, an ending period (for example, displaying "sorry" on the effect display device 1600) indicating the end of the small hitting game state can be executed (the present embodiment). 5 seconds) is provided, but during the ending period, not the ending effect that indicates the end of the small hitting game state, but the effect (continuation effect) that informs that the occurrence of the second hold memory is hidden. Just run it.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied a plurality of times and a plurality of occurrences of the second reserved storage are concealed, one occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed at a predetermined plurality of timings. Although it is sequentially notified that the occurrence of the plurality of second storages is concealed at a predetermined timing once, it may be collectively notified.

  By the way, in the case of notifying that when the second reserved storage occurs, the content of the notification is, depending on whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number (four in this example). It is changing. Specifically, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the second number of reserved storages does not reach the limit number, an effect of notifying that one second reserved memory has occurred is executed, When the number of second reserved memories reaches the limit number, as a subsequent effect, a special effect that is not normally executed (a special movie is played) is executed. As a result, when the special effect is executed, it can be recognized that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number. In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, regardless of whether or not the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number, the fact is not notified when the second reserved storage occurs, but (2) When the number of stored memories reaches the limit, the above special effect is executed. As a result, even when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved storage number has reached the limit number at least by executing the special effect, and the second starting opening 2004 in the chance mode. We are trying to avoid unnecessary driving into. In addition, when the above-mentioned concealment condition is satisfied, after the second hold storage is generated, an effect of notifying that the second hold storage has already occurred is executed at a predetermined timing, When the special effect described above is executed, such an effect is not executed.

  Next, a specific example of concealing that the second hold storage has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 170.

  First, the first specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 shows a case where one second reserved memory, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage occurs is executed. Then, after the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of one second reserved memory, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. The small hit game state is executed on the basis of being displayed, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game ball that has won the second big prize hole 2005b in the small hit game state is distributed to the V prize hole 2411. is doing. In such a big hit game state, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the second reserve memory occurs, the game is concentrated on entering the second big winning port 2005b in the big hit game state. Therefore, when the second hold storage occurs, the fact is not notified.

  Then, after that, when the big hit game state being executed ends, an ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state can be executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600. Although it is provided, during the ending period, not the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state, but the effect display device 1600 displays "Still still!" To notify that the second hold storage has occurred. To make it aware that the winning right exercise time will continue. In the ending period, after executing the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit game state, for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, the effect may be switched to the continuous effect and executed. In this way, the winning right exercising time ends by not notifying that when the second reserved memory occurs, but notifying that during the ending effect that is performed after the second reserved memory occurs. Then, it is possible to turn around from the recognition that the player is surprised.

  Next, a second specific example will be described with reference to FIG. 168. In FIG. 168, the variation display of the ordinary symbol is started immediately before the end of the big hit game state before the start of the chance mode, and the stop mode of the ordinary symbol becomes the ordinary symbol per symbol after the start of the chance mode, and the second in the time saving state. It is shown that the opening time of the starting opening door 2022 is controlled to a protruding state for 6 seconds to allow the game ball to enter the second starting opening 2004. With respect to the variable display of the ordinary symbols that crosses before and after the start of the chance mode, since the effect using the effect display device 1600 has not been executed, the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 after the start of the chance mode. Even when the player has entered the ball and the second reserved memory has occurred, the fact is not notified when the second reserved memory occurs.

  Then, if it is not notified at the time when the second hold storage occurs, in the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long variation time), the final battle effect (FIG. 166). See) is running. In such a final battle production, the player loses the battle at the end of the chance mode (when the long fluctuation time elapses), but after the end of the chance mode (after the long fluctuation time elapses), the battle loses. By executing the revival effect to win the battle, it is recognized that the winning right exercising time will start after the variation display of the first special symbol. In this way, when the variable display of the normal symbols crosses before and after the start of the chance mode, the fact that the second hold storage occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode is not notified and the occurrence of the second hold storage occurs. By notifying that to the effect later, it is possible to turn around from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is not started, and to give the player a surprise.

  In the second specific example, the case where the second hold storage occurs only immediately after the start of the chance mode is shown, but it is based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode. When the second second hold memory is generated and the second second hold memory is generated, the fact is notified and the transition to the jackpot gaming state at the winning right exercise time is confirmed. There is. In such a case, the winning right exercising time is shifted based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. Based on that, the small hitting game state is executed, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), immediately after the start of the chance mode. An additional effect for notifying that the second hold memory has been generated is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, when the second hold storage occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode, the fact that the second pending storage has occurred is not notified, but the fact that the jackpot gaming state is being executed during the execution time of the winning right is informed that the winning right is exercised. It is possible to give a surprise to the player by reversing from the recognition that the time is over.

  Next, a third specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 169, in the chance mode, when the stop mode of the normal symbol is the regular symbol per symbol, the second starting opening door 2022 is 6 seconds as the opening time of the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. It is possible to enter the game ball into the second starting port 2004 by being controlled in the protruding state, but two game balls enter the second starting port 2004 in the protruding state, and the second special symbol side The case where two second reserved memories, which are the number of hit determination hits, occur consecutively. As a general rule, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state, but before the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. The second game ball may enter the second starting opening 2004. In such a case, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage occurs is executed. However, at the time when the second second hold memory occurs, in order to be aware that one game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. , I didn't tell you that.

  Then, after the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. The small hit game state is executed on the basis of being displayed, and the big hit game state is executed on condition that the game ball which has won the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit gaming state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. is doing. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), two rounds are set in the chance mode. An additional effect for notifying that the second hold memory of the eyes has occurred is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, during the chance mode, during the execution of the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage without notifying that when the second second hold storage occurs. By notifying that, the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over will be changed, and the player can be surprised.

Next, a fourth specific example will be described with reference to FIG. The fourth specific example shows a case where the last battle effect shown in FIG. 166 is not executed.
FIG. 170 shows a case in which one second reserved memory, which is the number of hit determination memories on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second hold storage occurs is executed. Then, the variable display of the normal symbol is started immediately before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the stop mode of the normal symbol becomes the normal symbol per symbol before and after the end of the chance mode, and the second starting opening 2004 in the time saving state. There is a case where the second starting opening door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds as an opening time, and a game ball can enter the second starting opening 2004. When a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 before and after such an end of the chance mode and a second hold storage occurs, it is not possible to notify that fact during the chance mode, and the second hold It did not notify when the memory occurred.

  After the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of the second holding memory, but during the winning right exercising time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. Based on that, the small hitting game state is executed, and the big hitting game state is executed on condition that the game ball winning the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hitting playing state is distributed to the V winning opening 2411. There is. While such a big hit game state is being executed, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round), before and after the end of the chance mode. An additional effect for notifying that the second hold memory has been generated is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, the fact that the second hold storage is generated before and after the end of the chance mode is not notified, and that fact is being executed during the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage. By notifying that the winning right exercising time is over, it is possible to change the recognition from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over, and to give the player a surprise.

  In the fourth specific example, before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, and the first second reserved memory is generated. Based on the above, there is shown a case where the big hit game state at the winning right exercising time is entered, but at that time, the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 2004, and the big hit game at the winning right exercising time. The transition to the state may not be confirmed. In such a case, for example, the second hold memory is generated based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the second hold memory is generated. If it is not notified at that time, in the ending period (5 seconds in this embodiment) in which the ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode can be executed after the end of the chance mode, the chance mode is about to end (3 seconds remaining). It is also possible to execute an additional effect for notifying that the second reserved memory has occurred to recognize that the winning right exercising time is started after the end of the chance mode. Further, for example, when the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second starting opening 2004 after the end of the chance mode, and when the second hold memory is not notified to that effect , During the display of the variation of the first special symbol that is performed after the end of the chance mode (after the ending effect of the chance mode) (change in loss), it is notified that the second hold memory has occurred after the end of the chance mode. You may recognize that the winning right exercising time is started after the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Even with these, even if the second reserved memory is generated before and after the termination of the chance mode, the fact that the winning right exercise time is not started is notified by notifying the fact after the second reserved memory is generated. It is possible to give a surprise to the player by reversing from the recognition.

[14-1. In case of power interruption during chance mode and exercise time of winning right]
In the present embodiment, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off due to a power outage or a momentary power failure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 incorporates information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the main control. A backup process (not shown) for saving in RAM is being executed. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the main control internal RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). The recovery process is executed to recover the state according to the information. For this reason, on the main control board 1310 side, even if the power is cut off during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time, the power is turned on to return to the state before the power was cut off.

  That is, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, by turning on the power, only the remaining time of the chance mode (the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the first special symbol display 1403 The variable display of one special symbol will be restarted. In addition, when power interruption occurs during the variation display of the normal symbol in the chance mode, the power is turned on, and only the remaining time of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Will be restarted. Further, when the power is shut off during the opening of the second starting port 2004 (during the control of the second starting port door 2022 in the projecting state) in the chance mode, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is turned on by turning on the power. The opening of the second starting port 2004 (the protruding state of the second starting port door 2022) will be restarted by the remaining time. In addition, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the power is turned on, the number of the first pending storage, the number of the second pending storage, the number of ordinary design pending storage (the number of ordinary design pending storage) before power off Then, the display on the first special reserved number indicator 1404, the second special reserved number indicator 1406, and the normal reserved indicator 1408 will be resumed.

  On the other hand, when the power is cut off during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol during the winning right exercising time, the power is turned on, and the second special symbol display device 1405 corresponds to the remaining time of the second special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol will be restarted. When the power is cut off during the opening of the second special winning opening 2005b (during a small hitting game state) during the winning right exercising time, the remaining time of the opening time of the second special winning opening 2005b is caused by turning on the power. Therefore, the opening of the second special winning opening 2005b will be restarted. In addition, when the power is cut off during the opening of the first big prize hole 2005 (during the big hit game state) during the winning right exercising time, the power is turned on and the remaining time of the opening time of the first big prize hole 2005 The opening of the first big winning opening 2005 will be restarted by that much. In addition, if the power is cut off during the winning right exercise time, the power is turned on and the number of the first pending storage, the number of the second pending storage, and the number of universal figure pending storage (the number of ordinary symbol pending storage) are before power off. The display on the first special reserved number display 1404, the second special reserved number display 1406, and the normal reserved display 1408 is restarted.

  By the way, on the main control board 1310 side, when the power is cut off during the chance mode and the winning right exercising time, there is a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 when the power is cut off, showing the progress of the game. Since a backup process of storing information (for example, various flags) in the main control built-in RAM is executed, the state before power-off is restored by turning on the power, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 side does Since there is no backup power supply for supplying electric power to the control board 1510 and no backup processing is executed, even if the power is turned on, it is not possible to return to the state before the power shutdown.

  That is, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the display of the effect display device 1600 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 side is restarted by turning on the power. However, before the power is turned off, the first special figure corresponding decorative pattern is variably displayed in the first special figure corresponding decorative display area 1606 (see FIG. 165) in the effect display device 1600. On the 1510 side, it is not possible to understand that the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 is restarted, and the first special symbol corresponding decoration display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600 has the first special symbol. The variable display of the graphic corresponding decorative pattern is not restarted. In addition, before the power is turned off, the timer display area 1611 (see FIG. 165) indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 side has the first special symbol. The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol on the display 1403 (remaining time of the chance mode) cannot be grasped, and the remaining time of the chance mode is not shown in the timer display area 1611 of the effect display device 1600. . If the power is not shut off during the chance mode, the last battle effect can be executed during the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the elapse of the long fluctuation time). On the side, the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 (remaining time of the chance mode) cannot be grasped, and the last battle effect is executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600. Without performing, the same effect as the effect (background display, etc.) before the execution of the last battle effect is performed. However, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the main control board 1310 sends to the peripheral control board 1510 a power-on state command indicating the game state at the time of power-on, so the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time. It is possible to understand that it is in the middle (during the chance mode).

  In addition, before the power is shut off, the universal figure corresponding decorative pattern is variably displayed in the universal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 in the effect display device 1600, and the left, middle and right decorative patterns 1605 are variably displayed (see FIG. 165). However, when the power is cut off during the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary hold display 1408 in the chance mode, the peripheral control board 1510 side restarts the variable display of the ordinary symbol when the power is turned on. Cannot be grasped, and the variable display of the universal figure corresponding decorative pattern in the universal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 in the effect display device 1600 and the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 1605 are not restarted. . However, after the power is turned on (after the power is returned), when the new variable display of the normal symbol on the normal hold display unit 1408 is started, the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is a normal figure synchronization effect start command. Since it is transmitted, the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp that a new variable display of the ordinary pattern is started at that timing, and the effect display device 1600 displays the decoration corresponding to the figure in the figure corresponding decoration display area 1608. The variable display of the symbols and the variable display of the left / middle / right decorative symbols 1605 can be resumed.

  Further, before the power is shut off, the number of public figure holding storages (the number of holding storages of normal symbols) is displayed in the general figure holding display areas 1609a to 1609d in the effect display device 1600 (see FIG. 165), but in the chance mode. When the power supply is shut off, the peripheral control board 1510 side cannot grasp the number of ordinary figure hold storages by turning on the power, and the ordinary figure hold display areas 1609a to 1609d in the effect display device 1600 can be used. The display of the number of reserved universal memories is hidden without restarting the display of the number of reserved memories. However, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), when the number of stored ordinary symbols changes (when the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 or when the normal symbol variable display control on the regular symbol display 1402 is started) Since the normal control memory command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the number of ordinary figures reserved memory at that timing, and then the number of ordinary figures reserved memory is displayed. Can be resumed.

  In addition, before the power is shut off, the second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d of the effect display device 1600 are displayed with the second number of reserved memories (excluding those in which the occurrence of the second reserved memory is hidden). 165), but when the power is shut off during the chance mode, the peripheral control board 1510 side cannot grasp the second reserved memory number by turning on the power and the first display in the effect display device 1600. The display of the second reserved storage number is hidden without restarting the display of the second reserved storage number in the second special figure reserved display areas 1610a to 1610d. Then, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), when the second reserved memory number changes (when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, or the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 1405). At the start of the variable display control), a special symbol 2 storage command (hold number command) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Can be grasped. However, the second reserved storage number differs from the case of the universal figure reserved storage number when the peripheral control board 1510 side changes the second reserved storage number after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). While grasping, the non-display of the second reserved storage number is continued without restarting the display of the second reserved storage number in the second special figure suspension display areas 1610a to 1610d in the effect display device 1600, and during the chance mode. Changes all of the second hold memory to a hidden state. That is, if the occurrence of the second pending storage is not hidden before the power is cut off in the chance mode, the occurrence of the second pending storage is hidden after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) in the chance mode. It is supposed to change. On the other hand, if the occurrence of the second hold storage was hidden before the power was turned off in the chance mode, the state where the occurrence of the second hold storage was hidden after the power was turned on (after the power was restored) in the chance mode was I am going to keep it.

  As described above, in the chance mode and during the winning right exercise time, when the second reserved memory number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the peripheral control board 1510 side can grasp the second reserved memory number. Whether or not the occurrence of the second hold storage before power-off was hidden was determined by the peripheral control board 1510 side, and therefore cannot be grasped after power-on (after power-on). For example, during the chance mode or during the right exercise time, regardless of whether or not the occurrence of the second pending storage was hidden before the power was turned off, the change in the number of the second pending storage after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). At that time, if all of the second hold storage numbers are changed to the disclosed state, even the state in which the occurrence of the second hold storage was concealed before the power is shut off is disclosed, and is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (2) The number of stored memories suddenly increases, which gives the player a feeling of strangeness. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, during the chance mode or during the right exercising time, regardless of whether or not the occurrence of the second pending storage was concealed before the power was cut off, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). Even if the number of second reserved memories changes, all the second reserved memories are concealed, and are concealed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) due to the arrival of the above-mentioned notification timings A to C. By individually notifying each of the second hold memories, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden increase in the number of second hold memories. That is, the game situation (whether in the chance mode or the winning right exercising time, etc.) when the information about the second reserved memory number is grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side after the power is turned on (the power is restored), and it is grasped. Based on the number of second reserved memories, each time the aforementioned notification timings A to C sequentially arrive, the second reserved memories concealed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) are individually notified one by one. There is. In addition, when individually informing the secret second reserved memory, at least one second reserved memory is notified at a timing before the next big hit game state is started, so that the player is incurred a loss. It can also be prevented from being given.

  Further, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), and a new second reserved memory is generated, When the second hold storage occurs, the fact is not notified (the occurrence of the second hold storage is kept secret). In other words, if the power is not shut off during the chance mode, it is a timing of entering the ball that does not satisfy the concealment condition when the second hold storage occurs, and notifies that when the second hold storage occurs. Even if it is a thing (a state in which the occurrence of the second hold storage is disclosed), the second hold storage is generated after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is shut off in the chance mode. At that time, the fact is not notified (the occurrence of the second hold storage is kept secret). As described above, in the present embodiment, whether the power is shut off during the chance mode and whether the power is shut off during the chance mode are concealed when the second hold storage occurs. Is different. As a result, for example, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) in the case where the power is shut off during the chance mode, all of the second reserved memories generated before and after the power is turned on (the power is restored) are hidden. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how many second holding memories have occurred during the chance mode, and the player is expected to play a big jackpot while the winning rights are exercised. A new game property can be given. When a new second hold storage occurs after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), as a period for continuing the process of concealing the occurrence of the second hold storage, a series of advantageous states (chance mode and winning It may be done until all the exercise time (right exercise time) is finished and the normal state is controlled, or after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the jackpot game state is ended and the next chance mode (the timer for the remaining time operates). It may be until the normal chance mode) is started.

  After the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the result of the lottery process (ordinary judgment) for the normal symbols that is newly performed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). If is a normal hit, the hit design of the universal design corresponding decorative design is stopped and displayed in the universal design corresponding decorative display area 1608, and the hit design of the left, middle, and right decorative design 1605 is also stopped and displayed. As an example, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, when the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the new symbol newly performed after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is a normal hit, the left, middle and right decorative symbols 1605 are hit symbols. It is also possible to stop and display symbols that are not present (for example, unbalanced eyes). In such a case, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), not only the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol (remaining time of the chance mode), but also the possibility that the second reserved memory occurs may be played. It is difficult for a person to recognize, and it is possible to create a game situation in which the player can pay more attention to a change in the game area 5a regarding the opening of the second starting opening 2004 (the protruding state of the second starting opening door 2022) that suddenly appears. .

  When the power is shut off during the chance mode, all of the second pending memories generated before and after the power is turned on (power is restored) are hidden, but during the subsequent winning right exercise time, It informs that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden. As described above, when the power is not cut off during the chance mode, the game situation when the occurrence of the second hold memory is hidden (whether during the chance mode or during the winning exercise time) , And the notification timing is changed based on the number of concealed second reserved memories and the number of non-concealed second reserved memories (the number of disclosed second reserved memories). When the power is cut off during the chance mode, the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed because all of the second reserved storage generated before and after the power is turned on (power is restored) is concealed. There is another way of determining the timing for informing.

  Specifically, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, at the start of the subsequent winning right exercising time (while the second special symbol is being changed and displayed), the winning right is selected as an effect using the effect display device 1600. By executing the start-time effect that indicates that the exercise time is started, it is notified that the occurrence of the second hold memory is hidden. Further, although all of the second reserved memories generated before and after the power is turned on (returned to the power source) are concealed, if the number of the concealed second reserved memories is two or more, it is 1 In addition to notifying that the occurrence of the second second hold memory is hidden, by executing the above button effect during the execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, the second The notification that the occurrence of the second pending storage of is concealed is notified. In addition, after the notification that the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is hidden, if the occurrence of the second reserved memory is still confidential, the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time is executed. The button effect is executed each time the notification is made, thereby sequentially notifying that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden. In this way, by concealing all the second reserved memories after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), and by individually notifying the concealed second reserved memories at a predetermined timing, the second reserved memory is stored as described above. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the sudden increase in the number of memories. In addition, when individually notifying the concealed second reserved memory, at least one second reserved memory is notified before the next big hit game state is started, which causes a loss to the player. Can also be prevented.

  As described above, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the second number of reserved storages reaches the limit number, as a subsequent effect, a special effect (special effect) that is not normally executed. Even if the movie is played, etc.), the special effect described above is executed even when the number of second reserved memories reaches the limit before and after the power is turned on (power is restored) in the chance mode. .. As a result, even if the generation of the second hold storage is concealed before and after the power is turned on (power is restored), at least the fact that the second hold storage number has reached the limit number by executing the special effect is displayed. This can be recognized, and unnecessary driving into the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode can be avoided.

  Next, a specific example (fifth specific example) in the case where the power supply is interrupted during the chance mode will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 171, two game balls enter the second starting opening 2004 that is in the protruding state, as in the third specific example, before the power is shut off in the chance mode, and the second special A case is shown in which two second reserved memories, which are the number of hit judgment memories on the symbol side, occur consecutively. In such a case, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second reserved memory occurs is executed, but the second second reserved memory is executed. When the occurrence occurs, it is kept in a secret state without notifying that effect and increasing the number of second reserved memories displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  Then, after the power is turned on in the chance mode and after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the second reserved storage number is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, so that the two second occurrences before the power is turned off. All of the hold memories are in a hidden state. Further, if the third second hold storage occurs after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) when the power is shut off during the chance mode, the third second hold storage occurs. At that time, the fact is not notified, and the number of second reserved memories displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not increased.

  Then, after the end of the chance mode, it shifts to the winning right exercising time based on the occurrence of three second pending memories, but at the start of the winning right exercising time (during the change display of the second special symbol). The fact that the generation of the second hold storage is concealed is notified by executing a start-time effect that indicates that the winning right exercising time is started as an effect using the effect display device 1600. In addition, during the execution of the first big hit game state during the winning right exercising time, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round). Then, an additional effect for notifying that the second second hold storage has occurred during the chance mode is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, the second second hold storage generated during the chance mode is kept secret, and the fact is notified during execution of the big hit game state based on the occurrence of the first second hold storage. By doing so, it is possible to turn around from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over, and to give the player a surprise.

  Similarly, during the execution of the second jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round). In (), an additional effect for notifying that the third second hold storage has occurred during the chance mode is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time will continue after the jackpot gaming state ends. In this way, the third second hold memory generated during the chance mode is kept secret, and the fact is notified during execution of the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of the second second hold memory. By doing so, it is possible to make a change from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over, and give the player unexpectedness.

  Next, a specific example (sixth specific example) in the case where power interruption occurs during the winning right exercise time will be described with reference to FIG. 172. In FIG. 172, during the chance mode, as in the third specific example, two game balls enter the second starting opening 2004 that is in a protruding state, and the number of hits is determined by the hit determination on the second special symbol side. A case is shown in which two certain second storages occur consecutively. In such a case, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect that notifies that effect when one second reserved memory occurs is executed, but the second second reserved memory is executed. When that occurs, the fact is not notified, and the number of second reserved memories displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not increased.

  After the chance mode ends, the winning right exercising time shifts based on the occurrence of two second hold memories, but during the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, the effect display device is displayed. Each round is shown as an effect using 1600. Then, when the power cutoff occurs during the execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, whether or not the occurrence of the second hold storage before the power cutoff was concealed is confirmed after the power is turned on (power is restored. Later), it cannot be grasped on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Therefore, in the third specific example, in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the execution of the big hit game state, as the effect using the effect display device 1600, the occurrence of the second hold storage during the chance mode occurs. In contrast to the case where the additional effect for informing that it is concealed was executed, in the sixth concrete example, such an additional effect is performed in a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during the execution of the big hit game state. Other effects (for example, effects similar to those in the third round) are performed.

  Then, after the jackpot gaming state is finished, the variable display of the second special symbol based on the occurrence of the second second reserved memory is started, but during the variable display of the second special symbol, By displaying "Still more!" On the effect display device 1600, a continuous effect that notifies that the occurrence of the second hold storage is hidden during the chance mode is executed, and the winning right exercising time continues. Make them aware. In this way, when power interruption occurs during execution of the big hit game state during the winning right exercise time, a predetermined round (for example, the fourth round) during execution of the big hit game state as a predetermined timing. In addition, the additional effect as in the third specific example is not executed, and instead, it is notified during the variable display of the second special symbol based on the occurrence of the second second reserved memory. By doing so, it is possible to turn around from the recognition that the winning right exercising time is over, and to give the player a surprise.

  In addition, on the effect display device 1600, the second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d display the second reservation storage number (excluding those in which the occurrence of the second reservation storage is hidden) (see FIG. 165). However, apart from that, a numerical value reserved display area smaller than the second special figure reserved display areas 1610a to 1610d is provided at the screen edge portion of the effect display device 1600, and the second reserved memory number is set as a numeral in the numeral reserved display area. It may be displayed by holding (for example, "1" if the second number of held storages is 1, and "2" if the number is 2). At this time, in front of the number hold display area, it is assumed that an accessory (a movable body or the like) provided in the center accessory 2500 is covered, and the number hold displayed in the number hold display area is displayed if the player does not look into the number hold display area. It is configured to be invisible. In addition, while the second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d do not display those in which the occurrence of the second reservation storage is concealed, the number special display area has the second special figure reservation display area. Regardless of whether the occurrence of the second reserved storage is concealed in 1610a to 1610d, the number reserved display shows the exact number of the second reserved storage. Thereby, in the second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d, when the occurrence of the second reservation memory is concealed, a player who wants to enjoy the concealment does not visually recognize the numeral reservation displayed in the numeral reservation display area. You can do it like this. On the other hand, for a player who wants to accurately grasp the number of second hold memories, by looking into the back side of the accessory (movable body etc.), the number hold displayed in the number hold display area can be visually confirmed. Good. Regarding the second reserved storage number, unlike the case of the universal figure reserved storage number, when the second reserved storage number changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the peripheral control board 1510 side displays the second reserved storage number. While grasping, the non-display of the second reserved storage number is continued without restarting the display of the second reserved storage number in the second special figure suspension display areas 1610a to 1610d in the effect display device 1600, and during the chance mode. Changes all of the second hold memory to a hidden state. On the other hand, in the number hold display area of the effect display device 1600, when the number of second hold memories changes after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the number hold display is restored by accurately returning the number hold display. To be able to grasp.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the second hold storage generated after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is switched so as to be hidden. Operation buttons: "concealment mode" that conceals the occurrence of the second reserved memory and "non-concealment mode" that does not conceal the occurrence of the second reserved memory (all are disclosed) during the chance mode. The player may select it by operating 410. In such a case, in the "concealment mode", the fact that the second reserved memory is generated is not notified when the second reserved memory occurs, and the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed during the winning right exercising time after the end of the chance mode. In contrast to this, in the "non-confidential mode", since the fact is notified at the time when the second reserved memory occurs, the timing at which the player recognizes the occurrence of the second reserved memory is different. Therefore, different game characteristics can be enjoyed depending on the mode selected by the player.

[15. Example of production]
Next, a mode example of the effect display executed on the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIG. 173 is an example of the effect display that is executed when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode by controlling the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode, and FIG. 174 is the second during the chance mode. FIG. 175 is an example of the effect display executed when the chance mode is ended without accepting the game ball in the starting opening 2004, and FIG. 175 shows that the second reserved memory number when the remaining time of the chance mode is 10 seconds. It is an example of the effect display during the last battle effect that is executed if it is not, and the game ball is accepted in the second starting opening 2004 when it is lost as a result of the variable display in the long variable time of the first special symbol. FIG. 176 is an example of an effect display that is sometimes executed, and FIG. 176 is a last battle when a big hit is obtained as a result of the variation display in the long variation time of the first special symbol. It is an example of the effect display to be executed by the out.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (A), as a result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol, when the big hit (10R big hit A) that is controlled in a time saving state after the big hit game state is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol Then, the first special map corresponding decorative display area 1606 is variably displayed, and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1605 are variably displayed, and after the lapse of a predetermined period, the first special figure corresponding decorative display area When the big hit pattern of the first special drawing corresponding decorative pattern is stopped and displayed at 1606 and the big hit pattern of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1605 is stopped and displayed, after the big hit is notified, the big hit game state is controlled. Start (FIG. 173 (B)). Note that, as shown in FIG. 173 (A), in the normal mode, the effect display device 1600 includes the first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606, the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607, and the general figure corresponding decoration display area 1608. In addition to the above, first special figure reservation display areas 1613a to 1613d for displaying the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special random number stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are provided at the bottom.

  Then, after the big hit game state, the fact that the chance mode (time saving state) is controlled is notified, and the right hit is displayed in the mode information display area 1612 (FIG. 173 (C)), and the first reserved memory number is 0. When it disappears, the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time, and the first special symbol corresponding decorative display region is variably displayed in the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. (FIG. 173 (D)). As described above, during the chance mode, the timer display area 1611 indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed, and the timer display area 1611 is displayed according to the elapsed time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The remaining time will be updated and displayed.

  In addition, when the number of reserved storage of normal symbols is not 0, in synchronization with the variable display of normal symbols, the universal symbol corresponding decorative display region is variably displayed and the left / middle / right ornaments are displayed. The design 1605 is variably displayed, and after a predetermined period of time, the universal design corresponding decorative display region 1608 is stopped and displayed as a universal design corresponding decorative design with a design according to the result of the lottery process for the regular design, and the left, middle, and right decorations are also displayed. The symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed as a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the ordinary symbol (FIG. 173 (E)). At this time, if the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the ordinary symbol is a normal hit, the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the universal symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608, and the left, middle and right ornaments are also displayed. The hit symbol of the symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 173 (F)).

  The main control board 1310 is the second by opening the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 forward for a predetermined period when the normal design hitting display of the normal design is stopped and displayed on the normal design display 1402. The state of the starting port 2004 is controlled to an open state in which the game ball can be received. Then, when the game ball is received in the second starting port 2004 during the opening state of the second starting port 2004 and the second special symbol is held, the effect display device 1600 displays "Big hit get" and second. The star mark in the area (the second special figure reservation display area 1610a in the example of FIG. 173 (G)) corresponding to the generated reservation among the special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d is displayed in a special mode (for example, red). By doing so, the fact that the right to be a big hit (winning right) has been obtained is notified (FIG. 173 (G)).

  After that, if there is the remaining time of the chance mode and the number of reserved storages of ordinary symbols, the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbols are variably displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbols again and left / middle. -The decorative pattern 1605 on the right is variably displayed (FIG. 173 (H)).

  Further, when the game ball is not accepted in the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode and the remaining time of the chance mode becomes 10 seconds (FIGS. 174 (A) to 174 (C)), the last battle effect is produced in this example. By executing it, the result of the variable display of the first special symbol is suggested. That is, as shown in FIG. 174 (C), the player's character A and the enemy character B are displayed in place of the left, middle, and right decorative designs, and the duel scene between the character A and the enemy character B is displayed. (FIG. 174 (D)).

  Then, if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a loss, after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 174 (E)), if the second reserved memory number is 0, a chance is given. After notifying the player that the mode is ended and the chance mode is ended (FIG. 174 (F)), control of the normal mode is started (FIG. 174 (G)).

  In this way, when the remaining time in the chance mode becomes very short, by performing the effect display that is different from the normal display in the chance mode, not only the player's anxiety and anxiety but also the expectation for the big hit are expected. By making them hug, the interest in playing games is improved.

  Even when the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is lost, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 and the second special symbol is suspended during the execution of the last battle effect (( 175 (C) to 175 (D), after displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 175 (D)), the mode in which the character A is revived is displayed (FIG. 175). 175 (E)).

  Then, the chance mode is ended, the winning right exercise time is controlled, and the second special symbol corresponding decorative pattern is variably displayed in the second special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1607 in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. Together with the left / middle / right decorative design 1605 is variably displayed, and if the result of the hit determination on the second special design side is a small hit, then the second special design corresponding to the second special design corresponds to the second special design after the predetermined period has elapsed. The small hitting design of the decorative design is stopped and displayed, and the small hitting designs of the left, middle and right decorative designs 1605 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 175 (F)).

  The main control board 1310, when the small hitting design of the second special design is stopped and displayed on the second special design display 1405, the game ball can be accepted in the second special winning opening 2005b for a predetermined period, The peripheral control MPU 1511a displays "Aim for V!" On the effect display device 1600 to notify that the player should continue right-handing to aim at the V winning opening 2411 (FIG. 175 (G)). Then, based on the fact that the game balls have been accepted into the second special winning opening 2005b and one of the game balls has been distributed to the V winning opening 2411, it is notified that a "big hit" has occurred, and the jackpot gaming state. (FIG. 175 (H)).

  In this way, not only the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol, but also the result of the last battle effect is changed according to the occurrence of the number of retained memories on the side of the second special symbol, so that the occurrence of a big hit can be strongly expected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  When the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is a big hit, after displaying a mode in which the character A wins over the enemy character as a result of the final battle effect (FIG. 176 (E)), the big hit game state. Control (FIG. 176 (F)).

  After the jackpot gaming state, if there is no second reserved memory number, it is controlled to shift to the chance mode again (FIG. 176 (C)), and if there is a second reserved memory number, it is controlled to shift to the winning right exercising time. Become.

  If the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is a big hit, when the chance mode is ended, the big hit based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol regardless of the presence or absence of the second reserved memory number The control of the gaming state is executed. Then, after the jackpot gaming state, if there is a second reserved memory number, the winning right exercise time is entered and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. In other words, the advantage of the jackpot gaming state on the side of the first special symbol is given before the exercise of the right to be a jackpot accumulated during the chance mode.

  Also, the final battle production basically changes the result according to the result of the winning lottery on the first special symbol side, but at least the chance mode ends without notifying the player of that fact. Until then, it is concealed to the player that the first special symbol was a big hit. As a result, the player who recognizes that he / she will exercise the right to become a jackpot accumulated during the chance mode can be given the unexpected benefit of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the game is added to the game. The interest can be improved. Further, as described above, if the second reserved memory number is not 0, the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner with priority over the first special symbol. Therefore, after the jackpot gaming state based on the first special symbol being stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the winning right exercise time is entered and the jackpot right accumulated during the chance mode is exercised. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the interest in playing the game is deteriorated because the opportunity to exercise the right to be a big hit accumulated in the chance mode is rarely visited.

  In addition, as described above, when the right exercising time is right-handed, the game ball can be won in the second big winning opening 2005b, and the game ball that has won in the second big winning opening 2005b becomes the V winning opening 2411. Even if a big hit game state occurs after being sorted out, a game ball can be won in the first big winning opening 2005 by continuing the right hit. That is, after the shift control to the chance mode, the right stroke is continuously performed until the shift control to the normal mode is performed again.

  In addition, in this example, even when the player hits the game ball to the right, the game ball can be received in the first right starting opening 2002b, so normally, the game mode is controlled to shift to the chance mode until the chance mode ends or the winning right. A game ball can be accepted into the first right starting opening 2002b within the period until the exercise time is finished, and there is a first reserved memory number at the end of the chance mode or the winning right exercise time. Has become. That is, the chance mode is entered to enter the second starting opening 2004, and the winning right exercise time is entered to execute the jackpot gaming state by the number of the second reserved memories to win the prize ball. During the period, it is possible to generate a condition relating to the next game (acceptance of the game ball into the first starting opening 2002).

  If the game ball is accepted into the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) during the chance mode or during the winning right exercise time, the fact is notified. Good (not limited to the display for notifying that the game ball has been accepted in the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b), but also notifying by voice or lamp etc. Also, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an area for displaying the first reserved memory number even during the chance mode and during the winning right exercise time, and the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting). The display of the number of reserved memories may be updated when the game ball is received in the mouth 2002b). As a result, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 (first left starting opening 2002a, first right starting opening 2002b) during the right exercising time, so that the game mode is entered again and the long fluctuation of the first special symbol occurs. It is possible to recognize that the time varying display is started, and it is possible to enhance the interest for the acquisition of the right (winning right) to be a big hit.

  In addition, as described above, during the chance mode, a game in which a second special symbol is reserved (second special random number) is stored. Since the upper limit of the number of second reserved storages is 4, it is possible to store up to four second reserved special symbols (second special random number) during the chance mode. In this example, when the number of the second reserved memories reaches the upper limit of 4 in the chance mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a replaces the display of the decorative pattern or the timer display area 1611 on the effect display device 1600 with the special effect (special movie). May be executed). That is, when the number of second reserved memories reaches 4, which is the upper limit, the player stops driving the game ball until the winning right exercising time is reached. It is possible to eliminate the lack of handheld.

  In addition, since the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is increased based on the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the right strike is performed during the normal chance mode. A prompt display (mode information display area 1612) is performed. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a special effect (flowing a special movie, etc.) on the effect display device 1600 based on the number of second reserved memories reaching the upper limit of 4 in the chance mode, the right The display (mode information display area 1612) prompting for hitting disappears. As a result, unnecessary driving can be avoided so as not to be a disadvantage to the player, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game by being prompted for unnecessary driving. Further, in this case, the display is not limited to that in which the display (mode information display area 1612) that prompts the player to make a right stroke disappears, and any display can be suppressed (a conservative display) as compared with the normal display state in the chance mode. , For example, reducing the display (mode information display area 1612) urging right-handing, thinning the characters (translucent), changing the display position to an inconspicuous position, etc. You can

  Further, in the above-mentioned example, the long variation time of the first special symbol is set to 120 seconds, and it is configured to control to the chance mode only during this period. It is also possible to control to a plurality of types of chance modes having different advantages due to different periods. For example, two types of 68 seconds and 128 seconds are provided as a long variation time of the first special symbol, and when starting the variable display of the first special symbol in the time saving state, one of them is decided based on the variation random number. Good.

[16. Error notification]
Next, the error notification of the left-handed warning that is executed in the normal time (non-time saving state) will be described. 177 (a) is a table showing an example of effect sound data assigned to the effect channel, and FIG. 177 (b) is a table showing an example of error notification sound data assigned to the error notification dedicated channel. FIG. 178 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a left-handed warning error notification is executed.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the present example is put in the game state by executing the left-handed game in normal time (non-time saving state) and executing the right-handed game in time saving (time saving state). You will be able to get the corresponding profit. However, if a right-handed game is executed in a normal time or a left-handed game is executed in a short time, not only a profit according to a game state cannot be obtained but also a player or a game shop may be disadvantaged. . Especially when playing a right-handed game in normal times, it is difficult to accept the game ball at various entrances despite the large amount of ball consumption, which is disadvantageous to the player as compared to the case of left-handed play. It is in a state. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 and the second number of reserved memories is generated, the right to substantially win the jackpot (winning right) is acquired. Therefore, when the right-handed game is being executed despite the normal time (non-time saving state) in which the left-handed game is executed, the second starting port 2004 is illegally opened to open the game ball. It is also possible that there is a fraudulent act of entering. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, when a game according to the game state is not executed, the player is warned to prevent a disadvantage from being given to a legitimate player or a game store, and fraud by an unauthorized player. The act is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 177, in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b of the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a plurality of effect sound data corresponding to various effect sounds (FIG. 177 (a)) and a plurality of effect information sounds. The error notification sound data and (Fig. 177 (b)) are stored. Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, among the 32 output channels, the channel 1 (CH1) to the channel 2 (CH2) generate a notification sound based on the above-described error notification sound data being assigned. It is used as an error notification dedicated channel for outputting, and is not used for outputting effect sound. Channel 3 (CH3) to channel 32 (CH32) are mainly used as effect channels for outputting effect sounds based on the effect sound data being assigned.

  Then, in a normal time (non-time saving state), when a right-handed game in which a game ball is hit on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is being executed, the player is warned to perform a left-handed game (left-handed warning). Is designed to As shown in FIGS. 177 (a) and 177 (b), in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the left-handed warning is a notification sound made up of left-handed warning LV2 data belonging to a group of error notification sound data and effect sound data. The left-handed warning is issued using two types of notification sounds, that is, a left-handed warning LV1 data alarm sound belonging to a group. The left-handed warning LV1 data is assigned to the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) over the first time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), and the left-handed warning LV1 data is generated to the effect channels (CH3 to CH32). ) Is assigned to the left-handed warning LV1 as the left-handed warning of the first stage (level 1 = LV1; also called the initial stage), "Please return to left-handed" only once within the first hour. Is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The left-handed warning LV2 data is assigned to the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) for the second time (9 seconds in the present embodiment), and the left-handed warning LV2 data is the error dedicated channel (CH1). ~ CH2), the voice of "Please return to left-handed" is repeated three times within the second time as a left-handed warning of the second stage (level 2 = LV2; also called the final stage). The notification sound of LV2 is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 178 (a), the detection signal from the right area part entry sensor 4006 that detects the game ball that has entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 at normal time (non-time saving state) is mainly When the control MPU 1310a is input a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 times, any number of times may be set, one time or other plural times may be input), in other words, on the right side of the center accessory 2500. When 10 game balls are hit in the area, the main control MPU 1310a first assigns the left-handing warning LV1 data to one of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31, CH32 in this example), and the speaker 921. Also, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 (“Please return to left-handed” × 1) is output from the upper speaker 573.

  As described above, the left-handing warning LV1 data assigned to any of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31, CH32 in this example) is the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. Is executed at the volume adjusted by the player's operation with respect to (if the board volume is adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a by the game store staff at this time, the adjusted board volume is used as a reference. The volume according to the sub-volume value that is further adjusted and set by operating the selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. That is, when the left-handed warning LV1 data is assigned to any of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31, CH32 in this example), the effect select left button described above as the first-step left-handed warning. A notification sound of a left-handed warning LV1 (“Please return to left-handed person” × 1) is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 in a manner that reflects the volume adjusted by the player's operation of the control button 331 and the effect selection right button 332. Therefore, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 is perceived by the player among other effect sounds adjusted to the same volume, and the player feels uncomfortable and disliked by the right-handed regular player. The firing mode can be corrected without giving.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a inputs the detection signal from the right area ingress sensor 4006 a predetermined number of times (in this example, 10 times, any number of times may be set, and may be once or other times). Then, the left-handed warning flag is set, and the timer is measured for a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, any time may be set). Then, when the predetermined period elapses without inputting a detection signal from the right area ingress sensor 4006, that is, when the game ball is not hit in the right side area of the center accessory 2500 again within the predetermined period, a left hit warning is issued. Reset the flag. As a result, even if a detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 thereafter, a notification sound of a left-handed warning (left-handed warning LV1, left-handed warning LV2) is immediately output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Without outputting, the warning sound of the left-handed warning LV1 is output based on the number of detection signals input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 reaching a predetermined number (10 times in this example). There is.

  As described above, in the normal time (non-time saving state), the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV1 (“left-handed driving”) provided in the effect data on any of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31 and CH32 in this example). Please return ”× 1) and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and then a game ball is struck in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 again by a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example). If a detection signal is not input from the right area part entrance sensor 4006, the state returns to the initial state (the state where the game ball is not hit in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in normal time) and the right area part entrance sensor 4006 The left-handed warning is not issued until the detection signal reaches a predetermined number.

  In addition, each of the effect sound data corresponding to the above-described various effect sounds and the plurality of error notification sound data corresponding to each of the various notification sounds are respectively given priority numbers, and the effect sound with a small priority number (in this example, "Announcement 1") as the effect sound with the smallest priority number) and the notification sound with the lowest priority number ("RAM clear" as the notification sound with the lowest priority number in this example) are preferentially assigned to the effect channel or the error notification dedicated channel. Allocate and output. For example, when the notification sound of "communication error" of priority number 26 is assigned to the error notification channels (CH1 to CH2) and is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, "RAM clear" of priority number 1 is displayed. When it occurs, the notification sound of "RAM clear" is assigned to the error notification channel (CH1 to CH2) and overwritten on the notification sound of "communication error", and only the notification sound of "RAM clear" is output. At this time, the notification sound of the "communication error" is muted and is not output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound of the "communication error" is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. That is, when the output period of the "RAM clear" notification sound elapses, the volume of the "communication error" notification sound that has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that has been compulsorily set to silence is set again. The sound is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), the detection signal from the right area entrance sensor 4006 may be set a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example, and any number of times may be set once or at other times). Based on the input, the main control MPU 1310a informs the left-handed warning LV1 provided in the effect data on any of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31, CH32 in this example) (" Please return to left-handed ”” x 1) and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and after setting the left-handed warning flag, set a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, still any time) When the game ball is hit into the right side area of the center role object 2500 again and the detection signal is input from the right side area entrance sensor 4006 by the time Assigns the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Please return to left-handed” three times) provided in the error notification sound data to the error-dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2), and outputs it from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. A timer is measured for a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, any time may be set) without resetting the left-handing warning flag.

  In addition, as described above, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Return to left-handed” is repeated three times) assigned to the error dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2) and output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is generated. At a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume), there is no dependence on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a or the player operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. Executed. That is, when the game ball is hit in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in spite of giving the left-handed warning in the first stage, it is determined that the player is intentionally right-handed. As a second-stage left-handing warning, a large volume (not at all dependent on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a or the volume adjustment based on the player's operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. In the present embodiment, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (repeating “Please return to left-handed person” is repeated three times) at the maximum volume) is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, which makes it stand out from other effect sounds. Since the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 is output, it is possible to inform the surrounding players and the game shop staff that the suspicious behavior is being performed, and alert them.

  Further, as described above, when the notification sound is assigned to the error notification dedicated channel and is output, the sub-volume value of the track assigned to the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) and incorporating the effect sound is forcibly muted. Set to. That is, when the left-handed warning LV2 data is assigned to the error notification dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2), as the second-handed left-handed warning, the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a and the above-mentioned effect selection left are performed. A notification sound of a left-handed warning LV2 (“Please return to left-handed”) at a large volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) without depending on the volume adjustment based on the player operation on the button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. Since 3) is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 is recognized by the player, and the surrounding players and the game shop staff are informed that suspicious behavior is being performed. You can call your attention. When the output of the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 is completed, the left-handing warning flag is maintained, but the sub-volume value of the track in which the effect sound is incorporated is restored. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, by maintaining the state of setting the left-handing warning flag, it is possible to continuously output the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2, but the production sound cannot be heard. It is possible to prevent the deterioration of the interest in playing games.

  Further, when outputting the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2, the lamps / LEDs (LED 552a to 552c, LEDs 161a, 162a, etc.) provided on the door frame 3 are made to blink in a predetermined light emission color (for example, white). Has become. As a result, since the occurrence of an abnormality is notified not only by voice but also by sight, it is possible to strongly inform the surrounding players and game shop staff that the suspicious behavior is being performed, and to be alerted.

  In addition, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 ("Please return to left-handed" x 1) and the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 ("Please return to left-handed" x 3) are examples, and The output is not limited to the one that outputs differently, but may be output in a different manner. For example, a left-hand warning LV1 notification sound (“Please return to left” × 1) is output in a female voice, and the left The alarm sound of the hit warning LV2 (“Please return to the left” × 1) may be output as a male voice, or the content (word) of the alarm sound may be different, left “Return to left” may be output as the notification sound of the hit warning LV1, and “return to left” may be output as the notification sound of the left hit warning LV2. Moreover, you may implement | achieve these arbitrary combinations.

  Then, when the predetermined period elapses without inputting a detection signal from the right area ingress sensor 4006, that is, when the game ball is not hit in the right side area of the center accessory 2500 again within the predetermined period, a left hit warning is issued. Reset the flag. As a result, even if a detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 thereafter, a notification sound of a left-handed warning (left-handed warning LV1, left-handed warning LV2) is immediately output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Without outputting, the warning sound of the left-handed warning LV1 is output based on the number of detection signals input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 reaching a predetermined number (10 times in this example). There is.

  In this way, in the normal time (non-time saving state), the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Return to left-handed” is repeated 3 times) is provided in the error-dedicated sound data for the error-dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2). After allocating and outputting from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, if the game ball is not hit in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 again by a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example), it is returned to the left. It is determined that the state is returned to the initial state (the state where the game ball is not hit in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in normal times), and the number of times the detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 reaches a predetermined number. Until then, the left-handed warning is not issued.

  In addition, after outputting the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2, a game ball is displayed in the right area of the center accessory 2500 until a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, any time may be set) elapses. If not hit, the left-handed warning flag is reset and the left-handed warning flag A is set, and the game ball is again in the right area of the center accessory 2500 until a predetermined period of time elapses (until the time is shortened). If the detection signal is input from the right area part entrance sensor 4006 even once, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 is output to any of the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) (CH31, CH32 in this example). Alternatively, the left-handed warning flag A may be reset by outputting from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the left-handed warning flag may be set. As a result, when the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 is output before in the continuous non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier to output the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 than usual, assuming that there is a precedent. It is possible to call attention to the player and the game shop staff.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 178 (c), the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Return to left-handed” is repeated 3 times) provided in the error notification sound data is assigned to the error-dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2). After the output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, a game ball is struck in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 until a predetermined time period (60 seconds in this example, an arbitrary time may be set) elapses. When the detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 (when the left hit warning flag is set and the detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006), the error dedicated channel ( Left-handed warning LV2 notification sound (repeat "Please return to left-handed" three times) provided in the error notification sound data for CH1 to CH2) The lamps / LEDs (LED 552a to 552c, LEDs 161a, 162a, etc.) provided on the door frame 3 are blinked in white while being output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, It is sufficient to set an arbitrary time).

  That is, when the game ball is hit in the area on the right side of the center character 2500 even though the left-handed warning of the second stage is given, it is determined that the suspicious behavior is obviously performed, A large volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) is not relied upon by turning operation of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a or volume adjustment based on the player operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. By outputting the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (repeating “Please return to left-handed” three times) from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 is more prominent than other effect sounds. It is possible to output the information and inform the surrounding players and game shop staff that the suspicious behavior is being performed to call attention.

  In addition, a game ball is struck in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 while the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 (“Please return to left-handing” × 3) is being output, and a detection signal from the right area entrance sensor 4006 is received. When it is input, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Please return to left-handed” × 3) during output is continued without interruption, and the time required to output the left-handed warning LV2 notification sound ( Reset the notification time) and extend it. For example, a detection signal is input from the right area approach sensor 4006 during the second output of “Please return to left” in the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 (“Please return to left” × 3). In this case, by resetting the time required for the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 ("Please return to left-handed" x 3) as the notification time, normally, the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 is set to 10 seconds. When "Return to left" is output three times, "Return to left" is output five times in 15 seconds.

  In addition, a game ball is struck in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 while the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 (“Please return to left-handing” × 3) is being output, and a detection signal from the right area entrance sensor 4006 is received. When the input signal is input, the measurement is started again for a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, any time may be set) from the time when the detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006. When a game ball is hit in the right area of the center accessory 2500 and a detection signal is input from the right area entrance sensor 4006 by the time the predetermined period elapses, the error notification is given again to the error dedicated channel (CH1 to CH2). Output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by assigning the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 (repeating “Please return to left-handing” three times) provided in the sound data. On the other hand, from the time when the detection signal is input from the area entrance sensor 4006 to the time when a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, an arbitrary time may be set) elapses, the detection signal from the right area entrance sensor 4006 If is not input, the left-handed warning flag is reset.

  In addition, after the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 (“Please return to left-handed” × 1) is output, until a predetermined period (60 seconds in this example, any time may be set) elapses. A notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 may be output when the detection signal from the right area approach sensor 4006 is input a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times). As a result, the player who is accidentally hitting the right side hears the notification sound of the left-handing warning sound LV1 and adjusts the rotation angle of the handle 302 so as to return it to the left-handing side. It is possible to avoid the unexpected output of the notification sound of the left-handing warning sound LV2 at a high volume when a game ball is hit in the area of, and only the player who intentionally hits the right-handed person. By outputting the notification sound of the left-handed warning sound LV2 at a high volume, it is possible to call attention to the surrounding players and game shop staff.

  Further, both the predetermined period after outputting the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV1 and the predetermined period after outputting the notification sound of the left-handing warning LV2 are both 60 seconds, but the invention is not limited to this and one of them may be set. You may make it set to a period longer than the other.

  In addition, when the game state is shifted to a state (a big hit game state, a time saving state, etc.) in which a right-handed game is allowed while the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 or the left-handed warning LV2 is outputted, it is being output. The alarm sound of is stopped and the left-handed warning flag is reset. Similarly, when the game state shifts to a state in which the right-handed game is allowed with the left-handed warning flag set (big hit game state, time saving state, etc.), the left-handed warning flag is reset. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by outputting the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV1 and the notification sound of the left-handed warning LV2 even though the right-handed game is permitted.

  In addition to the left-handed warning in the normal time (non-time saving state), when a left-handed game in which a game ball is hit on the left side of the center role object 2500 during the time saving (time saving state) is being executed, or the center role object If a right-handed game in which a game ball is hit on the right side of 2500 is not executed, a warning (right-handed warning) may be given to the player so as to perform the right-handed game. Hereinafter, a modification will be described. FIG. 179 is a time chart showing an example of a case where a right-handed warning error notification is executed.

  In this example, a period in which the detection signal is not input from the right area part entrance sensor 4006 in a time-saving state, in other words, a period in which the game ball is not hit in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). Then, the notification sound of the right-handed warning (“please right-handed” × 1) provided in the error notification sound data is assigned to the error-dedicated channels (CH1 to CH2), and the volume adjustment volume 1510a is output from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The output is performed at a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) without depending on the volume control based on the turning operation of the knob portion or the player's operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. ing.

  In this way, if the game ball is not struck in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) in a time-saving state, the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated and the above-mentioned effect selection is left. A right-warning warning sound (“Please right-hand” × 1) with a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) without depending on the volume adjustment based on the player's operation on the button 331 or the effect selection right button 332. Is output and the sub-volume value of the track assigned to the effect channels (CH3 to CH32) and incorporating the effect sound is forcibly set to mute, so that the right-handed warning is more noticeable than other effect sounds. Is executed and the player can be surely made aware that they should hit the right side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, normally, in the time-saving state, the chance mode is displayed in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds). In addition, the time saving control is ended when the variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is executed once after the time saving control is started (the time saving number is once), so the time saving control is performed. The maximum period of time is 120 seconds, and the remaining period of the time saving state can be specified from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol.

  And the period until the notification sound of the right-handed warning is output according to the remaining period of the time saving state specified from the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (the game ball is in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the time saving state). You may make it change the period which is not driven. For example, in the case where the time remaining is 60 seconds after the time saving control is started (the time remaining is 60 seconds to 120 seconds), the period in which the game ball is not driven into the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is 10 seconds. When the time reaches, the right-handed warning is executed, and when the remaining time is less than 60 seconds and the remaining time is 30 seconds (remaining time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds), the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 is displayed. When the period when the game ball is not hit reaches 5 seconds, a right-handed warning is executed, and when the remaining time is less than 30 seconds until the remaining time becomes 0 seconds (remaining time 0 seconds to 30 seconds) The right-handed warning may be executed when the period in which the game ball is not hit in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 reaches 3 seconds. As a result, the right-handed warning can be executed at a timing corresponding to the remaining time in the time saving state, and the disadvantage for the player can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In addition, the right-handed warning may be changed according to the remaining period of the time saving state, for example, when the remaining time reaches 60 seconds after starting the time saving control (remaining time is 60 seconds to 120 seconds). The main control MPU 1310a assigns the notification sound of the right-handed warning LV1 (“please right-handed” × 1) provided in the production data to the production channels (CH3 to CH32), and outputs the above from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Output at the volume adjusted by the player's operation on the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332 (at this time, if the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated by the game store clerk to adjust the substrate volume. To operate the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 based on the adjusted board volume. If the remaining time is less than 60 seconds until the remaining time reaches 30 seconds (remaining time is 30 seconds to 60 seconds), an error occurs. The dedicated sound (CH1 to CH2) is assigned the notification sound of the right-handed warning LV2 provided in the error notification sound data (“Please hit right” is repeated three times) to allocate the volume adjustment volume 1510a from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. Output at a large volume (maximum volume in the present embodiment) without any dependence on the volume operation based on the turning operation of the knob portion or the player operation on the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332, and the remaining time is output. If the time remaining from 0 seconds to 0 seconds (remaining time is 0 seconds to 30 seconds) after 30 seconds has passed, the error dedicated channel (CH1 to CH2) is -Allocating the notification sound of the right-handed warning LV2 provided in the notification sound data (repeat "please right-hand" three times) to rotate the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 and A lamp / LED provided at the door frame 3 while outputting at a large volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) without depending on the volume adjustment based on the player's operation for the production selection left button 331 and the production selection right button 332. (LEDs 552a to 552c, LEDs 161a, 162a, etc.) may be made to blink in a predetermined emission color (for example, red). As a result, the right-handed warning can be intensified according to the remaining time in the time saving state, and the disadvantage for the player can be suppressed as much as possible.

  Further, when the game state shifts to a state in which a left-handed game is allowed (non-time saving state or the like) while the notification sound of the right-handed warning is output, the notification sound being output is stopped. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by outputting the notification sound of the right-handed warning even though the left-handed game is permitted.

[17. About production return when power cutoff occurs in chance mode]
In the present embodiment, when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off due to a power outage or a momentary power failure, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 incorporates information (for example, various flags) indicating the progress of the game in the main control. A backup process (not shown) for saving in RAM is being executed. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the information stored in the main control internal RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). The recovery process is executed to recover the state according to the information. Therefore, on the main control board 1310 side, even when the power is cut off during the chance mode, the state before the power is cut off is restored by turning on the power.

  That is, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, by turning on the power, only the remaining time of the chance mode (the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol), the first special symbol display 1403 The variable display of one special symbol will be restarted. In addition, when power interruption occurs during the variation display of the normal symbol in the chance mode, the power is turned on, and only the remaining time of the variation time of the ordinary symbol, the variation display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402. Will be restarted.

  By the way, on the main control board 1310 side, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, there is a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 when the power is cut off, and there is information indicating the progress status of the game (for example, various flags). In the peripheral control board 1510 side, power is supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is cut off. Since there is no backup power supply for supplying the power and the backup processing is not executed, it is impossible to return to the state before the power shutdown even when the power is turned on.

  First, during the time reduction of the first special symbol during the time saving (during the chance mode), and power interruption occurs during the change of the normal symbol, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the effect display device 1600 executed An example of the display restoration will be described with reference to FIG. 180.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (A), before the power is shut off, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol corresponding decoration display area in the effect display device 1600. In 1606, the decorative design corresponding to the first special map is variably displayed. Further, before the power is shut off, the remaining time of the chance mode (the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is shown in the timer display area 1611 of the effect display device 1600. In addition, before the power is shut off, in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1402, the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is variably displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 of the effect display device 1600, and left / The middle and right decorative patterns 1605 are variably displayed. It should be noted that in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, the chance mode is in effect, and a display for instructing rightward stroke is displayed.

  Then, during the change of the first special symbol during such a time saving (during the chance mode), and when the power shutdown occurs during the change of the normal symbol, all the information displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is hidden (FIG. 180 (B)).

  Next, when the power is restored, the effect display device 1600 displays "Now Loading" for power restoration (FIG. 180 (C)). When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is restarted, but the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize the restart. Therefore, the variable display of the first special diagram corresponding decorative pattern is not restarted in the first special diagram corresponding decorative display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600. Further, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the variable display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 is resumed, but the peripheral control board 1510 cannot grasp the resumption and the effect display It does not restart the variable display of the universal figure corresponding decorative pattern in the universal figure corresponding decorative display area 1608 in the device 1600 and the variable display of the left, middle and right decorative patterns 1605. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, which indicates a game state when the power is turned on. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time. You can figure out what is going on.

  And then, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped, the main control board 1310 sends a universal figure synchronization effect end command (general symbol stop display command) to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the periphery is generated at that timing. On the control board 1510 side, it is possible to understand that the variable display of the ordinary symbols is stopped, and a stop symbol for the universal symbol corresponding decorative symbols is displayed in the universal symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 in the effect display device 1600, and at the time of power-on. A combination display of the decorative patterns 1605 (for example, a predetermined combination display such as “913”) is displayed (FIG. 180 (D)).

  Further, when the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped, the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time at that timing. It can be understood that the first special symbol is changing (during the chance mode) at the time, and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding decorative symbol can be restarted in the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600. You can Further, in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command, the chance mode is in progress and the display for instructing the right stroke can be resumed.

  Further, when the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is stopped, the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time at that timing. The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at time (remaining time in the chance mode) is equivalent to any period of 30 seconds above 0 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less. It is possible to know whether or not to do so, and the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600 displays according to the period. Specifically, when the remaining time in the chance mode is more than 0 seconds and less than 30 seconds, "less than 30 seconds remaining" is displayed in the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600, and 30 seconds or more 60 When it is less than seconds, the display "remaining 30 seconds or more" is displayed in the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600, and when it is 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600. Is displayed with "60 seconds or more remaining".

  Next, during the time saving of the first special symbol (during the chance mode), and, when the normal symbol is not fluctuating, power shutdown occurs, and after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the effect display device 1600. An example of return of the effect display that is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (A), before the power is shut off, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol corresponding decoration display area in the effect display device 1600. In 1606, the decorative design corresponding to the first special map is variably displayed. Further, before the power is shut off, the remaining time of the chance mode (the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol) is shown in the timer display area 1611 of the effect display device 1600. In addition, before the power is shut off, the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is not changing, and the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 on the effect display device 1600 and left / middle. The right decorative pattern 1605 is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, the chance mode is in effect, and a display for instructing rightward stroke is displayed.

  Then, during the change of the first special symbol during such a time saving (during the chance mode), and when the power shutdown occurs when the normal symbol is not changing, it is displayed on the effect display device 1600. All information is hidden (FIG. 181 (B)).

  Next, when the power is restored, the effect display device 1600 displays “Now Loading” for power restoration (FIG. 181 (C)). When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is restarted, but the peripheral control board 1510 can recognize the restart. Therefore, the variable display of the first special diagram corresponding decorative pattern is not restarted in the first special diagram corresponding decorative display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600. Further, when the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the normal symbol is normally displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, but on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the normal symbol is changing or is being stopped. Can't figure out. When the power is turned on (when the power is restored), the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510, which indicates a game state when the power is turned on. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time. You can figure out what is going on.

  Then, after that, when the fluctuation of the new normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is started, a general figure synchronization effect start command (general figure variation pattern command) is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the timing thereof In the peripheral control board 1510 side, it is possible to understand that the variable display of the ordinary symbol is started, and the variable display of the universal symbol corresponding decorative symbol is started in the ordinary symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 in the effect display device 1600, and the left and the center are displayed. The variable display of the right decorative pattern 1605 has started (FIG. 181 (D)).

  Further, when the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is started, the special control 1 remaining variation time designation command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time at that timing. It can be understood that the first special symbol is changing (during the chance mode) at the time, and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding decorative symbol can be restarted in the first special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1606 in the effect display device 1600. You can Further, in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, based on the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command, the chance mode is in progress and the display for instructing the right stroke can be resumed.

  Further, when the variation of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display 1402 is started, the special control 1 remaining variation time designation command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 side saves time at that timing. The remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at time (remaining time in the chance mode) is equivalent to any period of 30 seconds above 0 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less. It is possible to know whether or not to do so, and the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600 displays according to the period. Specifically, when the remaining time in the chance mode is more than 0 seconds and less than 30 seconds, "less than 30 seconds remaining" is displayed in the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600, and 30 seconds or more 60 When it is less than seconds, the display "remaining 30 seconds or more" is displayed in the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600, and when it is 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, the timer display area 1611 in the effect display device 1600. Is displayed with "60 seconds or more remaining".

  As mentioned above, when the power is cut off during the chance mode, which is the fluctuation of the first special symbol at the time saving time, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), at the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time. The remaining time out of a certain 120 seconds, the variable display of the first special symbol will be restarted, when the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses during the change of the restarted first special symbol (when the normal symbol is fixed) ), Or at the time of the normal symbol variation start, the display of the left / middle / right decorative design 1605 and the like on the effect display device 1600 will be restored. Conventionally, when the power shutoff occurs, the display on the effect display device 1600 is restored at the timing of the change time of the special symbol (when the special symbol is fixed) or the timing of the start of the change of the special symbol. However, in the case of power interruption during the chance mode that is changing the first special symbol during time saving, when the change time of the first special symbol elapses (when the special symbol is fixed) or when the first special symbol starts changing. If the display on the effect display device 1600 does not return until the timing comes, not only the display on the effect display device 1600 does not return for a long period, but also the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 during the chance mode. Regarding whether or not (whether or not the second hold memory can be acquired), the player cannot obtain the main information of the variable display of the normal symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation time elapses during the variation of the first special symbol that is restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the regular symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol variation starts, By returning the display of the left / middle / right decorative design 1605 or the like on the effect display device 1600 at any timing of 1, the player can prevent such major information from being overlooked.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation time elapses during the variation of the first special symbol that is restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the regular symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol variation starts, At that timing, in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, the chance mode is in effect, and the display for instructing the right stroke is restored. As a result, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball does not enter the second starting opening 2004, etc., even though the remaining time is in the chance mode. The player is prevented from suffering a loss due to the player not right-handing.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation time elapses during the variation of the first special symbol that is restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the regular symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol variation starts, At that timing, the display is made according to the remaining time (remaining time in the chance mode) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time. With this, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the player can grasp the approximate time as the remaining time in the chance mode, and even after the power is shut off during the chance mode, the power is turned on (the power is restored). It is possible to play the game in the chance mode in (after) safely.

  In addition, for example, when power interruption occurs during the chance mode during the fluctuation of the first special symbol at the time saving, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time saving Is transmitted in a chance mode to the effect display device 1600 by transmitting the special variable 1 remaining variation time designation command instructing the time from 0 to 120 seconds to the peripheral control board 1510. The remaining time may be displayed in detail, but in such a case, the number of types to be prepared as the special variation 1 remaining variation time designation command becomes huge, and the ROM capacity of the main control MPU 1310a is compressed. Resulting in. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as the remaining time of the variation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time, 0 second, less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, and three classifications. By doing so, while allowing the player to understand the approximate remaining time in the chance mode, the types of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time designation commands are reduced as much as possible, and the capacity of the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a is prevented from being pressed. There is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation time elapses during the variation of the first special symbol that is restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the regular symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol variation starts, At that timing, the main control board 1310 sends the special figure 1 remaining variation time designation command to the peripheral control board 1510, so at the timing, the peripheral control board 1510 side has the remaining variation time of the first special symbol at the time reduction. It is possible to grasp which time period (remaining time in the chance mode), which is higher than 0 second, less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, or 60 seconds or more and 120 seconds or less, and the effect display device 1600 is provided. The timer display area 1611 is displayed according to the period. In addition to these, the remaining time of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time (remaining time in the chance mode) is again 30 seconds or 60 seconds, when the special control 1 remaining fluctuation time to the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may make it transmit a designated command. As a result, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the remaining time (remaining time in the chance mode) of the fluctuation time of the first special symbol at the time saving time is more than 0 seconds and less than 30 seconds, 30 seconds or more and less than 60 seconds, 60 seconds. The period corresponding to 120 seconds or less can be grasped in real time, and "60 minutes or more remaining" is displayed in the timer display area 1611 of the effect display device 1600 as a display corresponding to the remaining time in the chance mode. It is possible to sequentially display "30 seconds or more remaining" and "less than 30 seconds remaining". Therefore, after the power is turned on (after the power is restored), the player can grasp the approximate time remaining as the remaining time in the chance mode in real time. It is possible to play the game in the chance mode after the return) without anxiety.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal symbol variation time elapses during the variation of the first special symbol that is restarted after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) (when the regular symbol is fixed), or when the normal symbol variation starts, At that timing, the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600 is in the chance mode, and the display for instructing the right hit is returned, but if the right hit is not performed thereafter, the effect display is displayed. By changing the display instruction in the device 1600 and the voice instruction given from the speaker step by step, a warning effect for giving a warning to the player is executed. Whether or not the player is hitting the right side is determined by using the right area part entrance sensor 4006 provided as a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500, using the main control board. On the side of 1310, it is determined whether or not the detection is made by the right area entrance sensor 4006. That is, when detection is made by the right area entrance sensor 4006 on the main control board 1310 side, a right area entrance sensor passage command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, and the right area entrance sensor passing command is sent on the peripheral control board 1510 side. When the command to pass the area entry sensor is received, it is determined that the right-handed stroke is performed. On the other hand, when the main control board 1310 side has not detected by the right area entrance sensor 4006, the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the right area entrance sensor passing command and the right hit is performed. I have not decided.

  Specifically, in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, after the display indicating the right hit is in the chance mode, the peripheral control board 1510 side issues a right area entrance sensor passage command. It is monitoring whether or not it is received. Then, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, when it is determined that the right area entrance sensor passage command has not been received during the period when 10 seconds have elapsed, right-handing is not performed for 10 seconds. Therefore, the first warning effect is executed. In this first warning effect, the area other than the mode information display area 1612 in the effect display device 1600 is made smaller, and the mode information display area 1612 is made larger, thereby emphasizing the display for instructing right-handing (FIG. 182 (A)). In addition, the speaker emits a voice instructing right-handing such as "please right-hand" at the volume set by the player.

  Also, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, it is monitored whether or not the right area entrance sensor passage command is received even after the execution of the first warning effect. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, 20 seconds have passed after the display for instructing right-handing was restored in the mode information display area 1612 (the point when 10 seconds passed after the execution of the first warning effect). Then, when it is determined that the right area entrance sensor passage command has not been received during that period, it is determined that the right stroke has not been performed for 20 seconds, and the second warning effect is executed. In the second warning effect, the area other than the mode information display area 1612 in the effect display device 1600 is made smaller and the mode information display area 1612 is made larger than in the first warning effect, thereby instructing right-handing. The display is highlighted (FIG. 182 (B)). In addition, even if the player has set the volume at the desired level, the speaker outputs a right-handing voice, such as "please right-hand", at the maximum volume among the multiple levels that can be set. ing. As a result, in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600, while the chance mode is in progress and the display for instructing the right hit is returned, the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 and the second start opening 2004 are performed. The player is further prevented from suffering a loss due to the player not performing a right-hand hit, such as a game ball not being entered.

  Note that, in the above, after returning to the mode information display region 1612 of the effect display device 1600 in the chance mode and returning the display for instructing right-handedness, a specific time elapses as a period in which right-handedness is not performed. Each time, the display instruction on the effect display device 1600 and the voice instruction issued from the speaker are changed, but this is not limited to the elapse of a specific time, and is triggered by the establishment of a predetermined condition. , Those warning instructions may be changed. For example, in the chance mode, when a game ball enters the first left starting opening 2002a after the display for instructing the right hit is made (when the detection by the first left starting opening sensor 2002a is made). May determine that a left-handed stroke is performed and change the warning instruction. Even in such a case, the power is cut off during the chance mode, and there is a loss due to the player not performing right-handing even though there is remaining time in the chance mode after the power is turned on (after the power is restored). Can be prevented.

  Further, in the above description, after the opportunity mode is in the mode information display area 1612 of the effect display device 1600 and the display for instructing the right stroke is restored, a specific time elapses as a period in which the right stroke is not performed. For each time, the display instruction on the effect display device 1600 and the voice instruction issued from the speaker are changed, but when the remaining time in the chance mode at the time when the display for instructing right-handing is performed is small (specification If it is less than or equal to the time), those warning instructions may be changed from the beginning. Specifically, when the display for instructing the right-handed stroke is restored, the remaining time in the chance mode (first special time saving time based on the special figure 1 remaining variable time designation command transmitted from the main control board 1310) is returned. The remaining time of the variation time of the symbol), when it is understood that it corresponds to a period of more than 0 seconds and less than 30 seconds, the warning instruction changed from the beginning is given. As a result, if the remaining time in the chance mode is shorter than the time (10 seconds or 20 seconds as a specific time) at which the warning instruction is changed, the changed warning instruction is issued. The chance mode may end without failing to make a right-handed stroke without being warned, but by giving a warning instruction that has changed from the beginning, it is easier to notice that a right-handed stroke should be made. You can Therefore, even if the power is cut off in the chance mode and the remaining time in the chance mode after the power is turned on (after the power is restored) is short, a loss occurs because the player does not hit the right side. Can be prevented.

[18. About alerting when the number of first pending storage is 0 at the end of the big hit game state that triggers the entry into the time saving state (when not shifting to the chance mode)]
In the present embodiment, in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first special symbol is variably displayed, and when the 10R big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, the time saving is completed after the big hit game state. Controlled by the state. Also, at the end of the big hit game state, the first hold storage number which is the number of hit judgments on the first special symbol side is 1 or more, and the second hold which is the number of hit judgments on the second special symbol side. If the number of memories is 0, the variation display of the first special symbol in the time saving state, that is, the long variation time that is longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination as the variation time of the first special symbol (this In the example, the variable display is performed for 120 seconds). Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time, a game aiming at passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

  On the other hand, at the end of the big hit game state based on 10R big hit A (big hit to control in a time saving state), if the first reserved memory number is 0, the variable display of the first special symbol may be started. Without, the transition to the chance mode does not occur. Also, at the end of the big hit game state, if not only the first reserve memory number but also the second reserve memory number is 0, then the normal symbol is stopped by the passage of the game ball through the gate unit 2003. The mode becomes a symbol per ordinary figure, and the game ball is won in the second starting opening 2004 by being controlled to the protruding state for 6 seconds as the opening time of the second starting opening door 2022 in the time saving state, and the second special. The probability of variable display of symbols is high.

  In addition, during the big hit game state based on 10R big hit A (big hit to be controlled in a time saving state), the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (retracted state) as each round game, and the first opened state. In order to enter a large amount of game balls into the special winning opening 2005, the game balls must be driven one after another on the right side of the center accessory 2500. Further, when a game ball is driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 are always moving forward and backward. It constantly enters the inside of the driving door 2021, and the winning of the game ball to the first right starting opening 2002b occurs. For this reason, during the big hit game state, one or more game balls win the first right starting opening 2002b with a high probability, and are reserved as the first reserved memory number. However, in the big hit game state, if the game ball does not win the first right starting opening 2002b with a small probability, the first reserved memory number becomes 0 at the end of the big hit game state. .. Further, when the constantly driving door 2021 is not operating due to a failure of the always driving solenoid 2107 and the game ball cannot be won in the first right starting opening 2002b, or the game ball is not winning in the first right starting opening 2002b. Even when a fraudulent act is performed as described above, the first reserved memory number becomes 0 at the end of the jackpot gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, when the state in which both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number become 0 at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the 10R jackpot A (jacket to be controlled in the time saving state) Uses a lamp / LED (LED 552a to 552c, LEDs 161a, 162a, etc.) provided on the door frame 3 to immediately give a warning (first warning). Specifically, the lamps / LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are lit or blinking even during the normal performance execution, but in order to differentiate from the normal performance execution time at the time of alerting, Flashing is performed at a high speed that is not executed during the normal performance execution. In this way, at the end of the big hit game state based on 10R big hit A (big hit to control in a time saving state), if the state in which both the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are 0 occurs, , There is a possibility that the originally recommended game of starting the variable display of the first special symbol and shifting to the chance mode after the jackpot gaming state is not performed, but by calling attention to the outside, It is possible to convey to the hall side the possibility that an abnormality has occurred during the game. In other words, during the big hit game state, the normal drive door 2021 is not operating due to a failure of the constant drive solenoid 2107, and the game ball cannot enter the first right start opening 2002b, or the first right start opening 2002b. When an illegal act or the like is performed so that the game ball does not win, the hall side can notice early and it is possible to prevent the situation where the originally recommended game is not performed. As a result, the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the period in which the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the jackpot gaming state ends based on the 10R jackpot A (jacket controlled to the hour saving state) in the normal mode (non-hour saving state). At the time point, when a state occurs in which both the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number are 0, the number of times such a state occurs is counted. Then, when the same state occurs twice in succession, that is, at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the 10R jackpot A (jacket that controls to the hour saving state) in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the first hold When a state in which both the number of memories and the number of second retained memories become 0 occurs again, a stronger alert (second alert) than the first time is issued. Specifically, the lamp / LED provided on the door frame 3 blinks at a higher brightness than the first alert (first alert), or blinks at a higher speed. There is. In addition, although it is not performed in the first alert (first alert), the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 provide a notification sound to the outside that there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred during the game. I am trying to output. In this way, if a situation in which the originally recommended game might not be performed occurs twice in a row, by strongly alerting the outside, it is possible that an abnormality has occurred during the game. The sex can be transmitted more strongly to the hall side. That is, during the big hit game state, the normal drive door 2021 is not operating due to a failure of the constant drive solenoid 2107, and the game ball cannot be won in the first right starting opening 2002b, or the first right starting opening 2002b. When a cheating act or the like is performed so that the game ball does not win, the hall side can be surely noticed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned caution occurs when the big hit game state based on the 10R big hit A (big hit to control in a time-saving state) ends, and the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number become 0. This is not limited to the above case, and is also performed when the state in which the first number of pending storages is 0 and the number of second pending storages is 1 or more occurs. In such a case, the variation display of the first special symbol is not started after the jackpot gaming state is ended (without shifting to the chance mode), and the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. , In the same way as when the situation where the originally recommended game is not performed has occurred and the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both 0, the first caution An alert (first alert) and a second alert (second alert) will be issued.

  Further, in the above, at the end of the big hit game state based on 10R big hit A (big hit to control in a time saving state), the first hold storage number is 0 regardless of whether the second hold storage number is 0 or not. Although the alert is issued when the above condition occurs, the first alert (the first alert) may not be issued when such a condition occurs once. Specifically, during the period when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the 10R jackpot A (jackpot that controls to the hour saving state) in the normal mode (non-hour saving state) In the case where a state in which the first pending storage number is 0 occurs regardless of whether or not the second pending storage number is 0, the number of times such a state occurs is counted. At this point, no alert (first alert) is issued. Then, when the same state occurs twice in succession, that is, at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the 10R jackpot A (jacket controlling to the hour saving state) in the normal mode (non-time saving state), the second hold When the state in which the first pending storage count becomes 0 regardless of whether or not the storage count is 0, a strong alert (second alert) is given.

  However, at the end of the big hit game state based on 10R big hit A (big hit to control in a time-saving state), the state in which the first pending storage number becomes 0 and the second pending storage number becomes 1 or more occurs once. At the time point, unlike the time when the state in which both the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are 0 occurs once, it is preferable to always call attention. This is because in a non-time saving state such as during the big hit game state, the game ball hardly wins in the second starting opening 2004, and thus illegal acts are performed so that the game ball wins in the second starting opening 2004. This is because there is a possibility that a state in which the number of second reserved memories is 1 or more has occurred. Therefore, even when the state in which the first number of pending storages is 0 and the number of second pending storages is 1 or more occurs once, it is necessary to always call attention to perform fraudulent activity. In this case, the hall side can notice early and it is possible to prevent the situation where the originally recommended game is not played. At the time when the state in which the first number of reserved memories becomes 0 and the number of second retained memories becomes 1 or more occurs once, not the first alert (first alert) but the second alert. Similar to the alert (second alert), a strong alert may be given. As a result, the hole side can be surely noticed when an illegal act or the like is performed, and it is possible to further prevent the situation where the originally recommended game is not performed.

  Note that, in the above, when the state in which the first number of pending storages is 0 and the number of second pending storages is 1 or more occurs, the number of times such a state occurs is counted. The timing is limited to the end time of the big hit game state based on the 10R big hit A (big hit to be controlled to the time saving state) in the normal mode (non-time saving state). In the present embodiment, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started after the jackpot gaming state based on the 10R jackpot A (jackets controlled to the hour / short state) in the normal mode (non-hour saving state), the mode is shifted to the chance mode. However, in the game in the chance mode or during the winning right exercising time, the first starting storage number becomes 0 and the second holding storage number becomes 1 or more by the game ball winning the second starting opening 2004. It is a specification that causes a condition. Therefore, for example, at the end of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercising time, even if the state in which the first number of pending storage becomes 0 and the number of second pending storage becomes 1 or more occurs, be careful. I try not to call out.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the result of the hit determination on the side of the first special symbol is a big hit (10R big hit A in this example) that is controlled to a short time after the big hit game state, in the short time state after the big hit game state The first special symbol is variably displayed in a long variation time, and the second special symbol is retained (second special random number) within this long variation time, and the jackpot of a number equivalent to the second reserved memory is long varied. The game is sequentially generated after the passage of time, and then the game of displaying the first special symbol in a variable display with a long variable time can be repeatedly executed. As described above, the state in which the second special symbol is held (the state in which the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004) is a state in which the right to be a big hit (winning right) is obtained. , "Special information linked to a big hit" can be paraphrased.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can realize a novel game property having a cycle of repeating a state of storing special information connected to a hit and a state of sequentially releasing hits corresponding to the number of the stored special information. As a result, not only is the game simply waiting for a new hit after the end of the big hit game state to be executed, but "how much special information leading to a hit is saved within the time limit (long fluctuation time) (storage It is possible to play by giving both the tension of accumulating special information within the time limit and the satisfaction of gaining profit (big hit game state) collectively after the time limit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game after the big hit game state.

In addition, the configuration of accumulating a hold of the second special symbol (second special random number) during variable display of the first special symbol requires at least the following conditions.
“Variation time of the first special symbol during the time saving state> (Variation time of the normal symbol during the time saving state + maximum time during which the second starting opening door 2022 is in a protruding state when hitting the universal figure during the time saving state) × N ( N ≧ 2) ”, that is, the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed a plurality of times within the variable period of the first special symbol, and the game ball can be accepted into the second starting opening 2004 when the regular symbol hits. It is necessary to be able to control the state multiple times.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and it is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same operational effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko Machine 2 Outer Frame 3 Door Frame 4 Main Frame 5 Game Board 5a Game Area 6 CR Unit 10 Upper Frame Member 11 Engagement Notch 12 Mounting Step 20 Lower Frame Member 21 Engagement Notch 22 Front End Notch 30 Left Frame Member 31 Recessed portion 32 Protruded portion 40 Right frame member 41 Recessed portion 42 Protruded portion 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extended portion 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall portion 55 Return portion 56 Left mounting portion 57 Right mounting portion 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixing part 62 Front extension part 63 Bearing groove 64 Horizontal fixing part 65 Hanging part 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operating part 66c Elastic part 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal part 72 Rising portion 73 Lower hinge pin for outer frame 74 Discharge hole
80 curtain plate reinforcing member 81 left sliding member 82 right sliding member 85 connecting member 85A upper left connecting member 85B upper right connecting member 85C lower left connecting member 85D lower right connecting member 86 horizontal fixing portion 87 upper lateral fixing portion 88 lower lateral fixing portion 89 bent portion 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide vane 96 Guide vane 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through hole 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting portion 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Passage hole for lower tray 117 Passage for Upper Plate 118 Glass Unit Attachment 119 Speaker Insertion 130 130 Reinforcement Unit 131 Upper Reinforcing Sheet Metal 132 Middle Reinforcing Sheet Metal 132a Notch 133 Left Reinforcing Sheet Metal 134 Right Reinforcing Sheet Metal 135 Locking Locking Part 140 Door Frame Side Upper Hinge Member 141 Door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141a Projecting piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Collar member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extending piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Door frame left side upper decorative board 161a LED
162 Door frame Lower left side decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass Unit Mounting Member 171 Base Part 172 Projection Part 180 Handle Mounting Member 181 Cylindrical Part 182 Flange Part 183 Projection 184 Reinforcing Rib 190 Glass Unit 191 Glass Frame 191a Mounting Piece 191b Locking Piece 192 Glass Plate 194 Frame Decorative Amplifier Board 194a + 9V Creating circuit 200 Security cover 201 Main body 202 Rear projection 203 Locking piece 210 Opening / closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Keyhole 212 Rotation transmitting member 212a Notch 213 Cylinder mounting metal 213a Front plate 213b Side plate 213c Mounting plate 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Inlet 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Hitting ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball removing member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod portion 253c Operating rod 253d Weight portion 254 Ball feeding member 254a Blocking portion 254b Ball holding portion 254c Rod portion 255 Ball feeding solenoid 256 Ball feeding operating rod 257 Ball feeding crank 257a Engaging portion 257b Shaft portion 257c Transmission portion Member 261 Upper piece part 262 Lower piece part 263 Sloping part 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit body 272 Lid member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Fal ball receiving port 276 Ball discharging port 277 Storage channel 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank Detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening / closing contact portion 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base portion 301b Front end portion 301c Groove portion 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302es Lit 302f Locking protrusion 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single button 312 Single button Operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Dish unit 321 Upper plate 321a Induction passage 321b Grounding metal fittings 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate ball removal hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b Escape part 322c Sphere guide part (guide means)
322d Buffer unit (guide means)
322e Return part (guide means)
323 Dish unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guideway 323f Ball removal guideway 323g Opening part 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Body part 325B First expansion part 325C Second expansion part 325a Bottom Wall 325b Main body standing wall 326 Dish unit cover (cover)
326a Performance operation unit mounting portion (covering portion)
326b Dish front upper decorative part 326c Dish front lower decorative part 326d Lower plate opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Mounting space 327 Upper plate ball removal button (discharging operation part)
327a Operation transmission part 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball removal spring 328 Ball lending button 329 Return button 330 Ball lending / returning display part 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Bottom dish ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Bottom dish ball Extraction base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall 340b Ceiling part 365 Degree display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate first area A2 Lower plate second area PL Split line 400 Rendering operation unit (Coating part)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a First button decoration 411b Second button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Main body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame main 416a Central Opening 416b Peripheral opening 416c Cutout 416d Inner tube 416e Attachment 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Board unit 421 Board base 422 Operation button Left outer decorative board 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 operation button right outside decorative substrate 423a first LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Light-shielding wall part 432 Operation button interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall part 432b Front plate part 432c Opening part 432d Flange part 432e Attachment button 4 Inner decoration 423g Second button Inner decoration 433 Operation button Left inner decoration board 434 Operation button Right inner decoration board 435 Operation button Upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button Lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens Decorative board 438 Operation button Spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit Relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg section 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body section 451b Cover section 4 1c through hole 451d holding hole 451e upper bearing portion 451f lower bearing portion 451g rotation restricting portion 452 button shaft 454 press detection sensor 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration part 472b Screen part 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Operating gear member 475a Gear tooth 475b Stopper 475c Detecting piece 476 Sub-screen decoration member 477 Sub-screen decoration substrate 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recessed portion 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotational drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens unit 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Main body 512b Leg piece 515 Second effect operation relay board 516 Relay board cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Aperture 532 Left unit diffusion lens member 532A Upper diffusion lens member 532B Lower diffusion lens member 532a Circular lens portion 532b Shape lens part 532c Central diffuse reflection part 532d Front diffusion lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decorative base 535 Left unit lower decorative base 536 Left unit decorative cover 537 Decorative member 550 Door frame Right side unit 551 Right unit Base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
553 right unit left diffusion lens member 553a main body portion 553b rear wall portion 553c notch portion 553d accommodation recess 553e input lens portion 553f side reflection portion 554 right unit left decorative member 555 right unit left cover 556 right unit right diffusion lens member 556a main body portion 556b Rear wall portion 556c Cutout portion 556d Housing concave portion 556e Input lens portion 556f Side reflection portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 558 Right unit right cover 559 right unit left light shielding member 559a main body portion 559b rear wall portion 559c cutout portion 559d reinforcing portion 560 right unit Right light shielding member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-faceted decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Middle Base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decorative portion 574f Top right decorative portion 575 Speaker cover 576 Top inside decorative member 577 Door frame top inside decorative board 578 Guide Light member 578a Straight part 578b Arc part 578c Diffuse reflection part 578d Diffuse input part 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens part 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens part 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door Frame top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top Middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 Door frame top Middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Light-shielding member 589 Door frame top unit Relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Central axis (of operation button 410)
600 main body frame base 601 game board insertion opening 602 game board mounting portion 603 game board restriction portion 604 launching device mounting portion 605 cylinder insertion opening 606 connection opening portion 607 speaker opening portion 608 rear extension portion 609 upper hinge mounting portion 610 Lower hinge attachment part 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame opening switch 619 Body frame opening switch 620 Body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge body 622 Body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Control piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launching device 681 Launching base 682 Launching solenoid 683 Hitting mallet 684 Launching rail 700 Locking unit 70 1 Unit Base 702 Door Frame Hook 703 Outer Frame Hook 710 Key Cylinder 784 External Terminal Board 800 Dispensing Unit 801 Dispensing Unit Base 802 Ball Tank 803 Tank Rail 804 Ball Leveling Member 820 Ball Guide Unit 821 Front Case 821a Ball Guide Inlet 821b Sphere guide outlet 821c Guide passage 821d Introductory part 821e Detecting part 821f Meandering part 821g Notch part 822 Rear case 822a Ball guide inlet 822b Ball guide outlet 822c Guide passage 822d Introducing part 822e Detecting part 822f Serpentine part cutting part 822g 825 Movable piece member front 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extending part 825d Connecting part 825e Weight attaching part 825f Detecting piece 825g Stopper piece 826 Movable piece member rear 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension part 826d Connection part 826e Weight attachment part 826f Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball breakage detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge inlet 831b Discharge outlet 831c Ball discharge outlet 831d Discharge ball discharge passage 831e 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box 832a Discharge inlet 832b Discharge outlet 832c Ball discharge outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball discharge passage 832f Guide shelf 832g Lever mount 833 Front cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 836 Intermediate gear 837 Detecting piece 837c Connecting portion 838 Shaft member 839 Dispensing blade 839a Base cylinder portion 839b Front blade 839c Rear blade 839d Connected portion 839e Ball accommodating portion 840 Blade rotation detection sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Discharge detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Main body 843b Shaft cylinder 843c Projection 843d Weight attachment 844 Ball removal lever 850 Upper full ball path unit 850a Upper ball removal inlet 850b Upper ball removal inlet 850c Upper part Ball storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition 850g Upper ball discharge passage 850h Upper ball discharge outlet 851 Upper full tank base 852 Upper full tank cover 853 Discharging device pressing member 854 Back cover mounting part 860 Lower full tank ball path Unit 860b Error LED indicator 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 861 Normal taxiway 862 Full tank taxiway 863 Taxiway opening / closing door 863a Base part 863b First door plate part 863c Second door plate part 863d Extension part 863e Operation protrusion Part 8 64 Closing spring 865 Lower ball removal guideway 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss portion 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 870 Guideway opening / closing door 870a Base part 870b First door plate part 870c Second Door plate part 870d Recessed part 870e Operating protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Board unit 910 Board unit base 911 Door frame relay board 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power board box 934 Power switch 931 Power board 935 Power supply control unit 935a Synchronous rectification circuit 935b Power factor improvement circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply creation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Discharge control board box 951 Discharge control board 951a Discharge control filter circuit 952 payout control unit 952a payout control MPU
952b Discharge control input circuit 952c Discharge control output circuit 952d Discharge motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Fire control section 953a Fire control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding part 1004 Lower right rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stop part 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Security recess 1009 Positioning protrusion 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out recess 1112 Opening 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step portion 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step portion 1122 Through hole 1123 Projection pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement 1126 Out port 1127 notch 1128 mounting hole 1129 through opening 1150 gaming panel (Second Embodiment)
1151 Out port 1152 Notch part 1153 Insertion hole 1154 Inner rail fixing hole 1155 Mounting hole 1200 Board holder 1201 Discharge part 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1310a Main control MPU
1310aa main control CPU core 1310ae main circumference serial transmission port 1310aea transmission shift register 1310aeb transmission buffer register 1310aec serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb No reset function Main control output circuit 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V generation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round display Unit 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa peripheral control CPU core 1511ab peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control Bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display control unit 1512a VDP with built-in sound source
1512b Liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side effect
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forced switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixing piece 1602 Right fixing piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002a First left starting opening 2002b 1st right starting opening 2003 Gate part 2004 2nd starting opening 2005 1st big winning opening 2005b 2nd big winning opening 2011 Sorting member 2012 1st passage 2013 2nd passage inlet 2014 2nd passage 2015 2nd passage outlet 2016 Reception port 2017 Clune 2021 Continuous drive door 2022 Second start opening door 2107 Constant drive solenoid 2108 Second starting opening solenoid 2109 First attacker solenoid 2110 Second attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit Lower 2300 Side unit Upper 2400 V prize device 2410 Rotating body 2411 V prize hole 2412 Discharge port 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening 3010b Liquid crystal mounting part 3010c Fixed groove 3010d 3010e Fixed piece part 3042 Performance drive board box 3050 Back left inside decoration unit 3100 Back lower back movable performance unit 3200 Back upper left movable performance unit 3300 Back left movable performance unit 3400 Back middle movable performance unit 3500 Back lower front movable performance unit 4002a First left starting port sensor 4002b First right starting port sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second starting port sensor 4005a First count sensor 4005b Second counter Sensor 4007a First V winning opening sensor 4007b Second V winning opening sensor 4008 Discharge opening sensor 4020 General winning opening sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input section 4163 Voltage output section 4164 Detection circuit section 4165 RTC control section 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising unit 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Production display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side production module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side production module Backlight power supply circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR Transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

First lottery means for performing lottery based on establishment of the first start condition,
Second lottery means for performing lottery based on the establishment of the second start condition;
When the result of the lottery by either the first lottery means or the second lottery means is a win, special game state control means capable of controlling to a special game state different from the normal game state,
Second lottery priority means for performing the lottery by the second lottery means in preference to the lottery by the first lottery means,
Establishment frequency improving means capable of improving the frequency of establishment of the second starting condition more than usual after the end of the special game state,
At the end of the special gaming state, which is an opportunity to improve the establishment frequency of the second starting condition more than usual by the establishment frequency improving means, it is specified as the establishment condition of the first starting condition and the second starting condition. A game machine characterized by comprising a game status notification means for performing a predetermined notification to the outside when a game status is generated.